Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 276

OWNER’S

MANUAL
Ibiza
6F0012720BA
Inglés 6F0012720BA (01.17)

Ibiza Inglés
­­ (01.17)
SEAT recommends SEAT recommends
SEAT GENUINE OIL Castrol EDGE Professional
About this manual The equipment marked with an aster-
isk* is fitted as standard only in certain
For the sake of the environment

versions, and is only supplied as op- Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-
This manual contains a description of the vant information concerning environmental
equipment supplied with the vehicle at the tional extras for some versions, or are
protection.
time this manual was published. Some of the only offered in certain countries.
units described herein will not be available ® All registered marks are indicated with
Note
until a later date or are only available in cer- ®. Although the copyright symbol does
tain markets. not appear, it is a copyrighted mark. Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-
nal information.
Because this is a general manual for the >> The section is continued on the follow-
IBIZA, some of the equipment and functions ing page.
that are described in this manual are not in- This manual is divided into six large parts,
cluded in all types or variants of the model; Important warnings on a given page which are:
they may vary or be modified depending on Detailed contents on a given page 1. The essentials
the technical requirements and on the mar- 2. Safety
ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising. General information on a given page
3. Emergencies
The illustrations are intended as a general Emergency information on a given page 4. Operation
guide and may vary from the equipment fitted
in your vehicle in some details. 5. Tips
WARNING
The steering indications (left, right, forward, 6. Technical data
Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-
reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the mation on safety. They warn you about possi- At the end of this manual, there is a detailed SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-
normal driving movements of the vehicle ex- ble dangers of accident or injury. alphabetical index that will help you quickly stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason
cept when otherwise indicated. find the information you require. no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
CAUTION All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to
potential sources of damage to your vehicle. Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.


© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.01.17
Foreword You can access the information in this man-
ual using:
Thank you for your trust.
This Instruction Manual and its correspond- ● Thematic table of contents that follows the
We wish you safe and enjoya-
ing supplements should be read carefully to manual’s general chapter structure. ble motoring with your vehicle.
familiarise yourself with your vehicle.
● Visual table of contents that uses graphics
Besides the regular care and maintenance of to indicate the pages containing “essential” SEAT, S.A.
the vehicle, its correct handling will help pre- information, which is detailed in the corre-
serve its value. sponding chapters.
For safety reasons, always note the informa- ● Alphabetical index with many terms and
tion concerning accessories, modifications synonyms to help you find information.
and part replacements.
WARNING
If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board
documentation to the new owner, as it Read and always observe safety informa-
should be kept with the vehicle. tion concerning the passenger's front air-
bag ››› page 78, Important information
regarding the front passenger's airbag.
Table of Contents

Table of Contents Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Why wear a seat belt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
67
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
111
How to properly adjust your seatbelt . . . . . . . . 70 Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
The essentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Belt pretensioners* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Anti-theft alarm* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Boot hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Interior view (left-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Airbag safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper sys-
Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Adjusting the seat and head restraints . . . . . . 135
Journey data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . 85 Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Towing or tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . . . . 139
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Practical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Roof carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Fluid Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Halogen headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Changing the fog light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Changing the tail light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Changing the interior light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Manual air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Action in the event of a puncture . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
General instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Instruments and warning/control lamps . . . . . 100 Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 155
How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . 59
Warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Braking and stability systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Introduction to the Easy Connect system* . . . . 105 Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 System settings (CAR)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Safety first! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Communications and multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Run-in and economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Steering wheel controls* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Engine management and exhaust gas purifica-
Correct position for passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 tion system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

3
Table of Contents

Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250


Start-Stop System* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Area monitoring system (Front Assist) includ- Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
ing City emergency braking and pedestrian Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
monitoring* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Adaptive Cruise Control ACC* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
SEAT Drive Profile* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Fatigue detection (break recommendation)* . . 200 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Rear Assist “Rear View Camera”* . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Accessories and modifications to the vehi-
cle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Caring for the vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 232
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Spare wheel (temporary spare wheel)* . . . . . . 248
Winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

4
The essentials

Exterior view

1 ››› page 9 4 ››› page 45 7 ››› page 10


2 ››› page 8 5 ››› page 45 8 ››› page 49
3 ››› page 56 6 ››› page 11

5
The essentials

Exterior view

1 ››› page 46 4 ››› page 48 7 ››› page 47 10 ››› page 50


2 ››› page 45 5 ››› page 45 8 ››› page 143
3 ››› page 47 6 ››› page 47 9 ››› page 51

6
The essentials

Interior view (left-hand drive)

1 ››› page 10 5 ››› page 34 9 ››› page 23 13 ››› page 38 17 ››› page 13
2 ››› page 12 6 ››› page 36 10 ››› page 25 14 ››› page 22 18 ››› page 11
3 ››› page 22 7 ››› page 24 11 ››› page 39 15 ››› page 10 19 ››› page 11
4 ››› page 23 8 ››› page 27 12 ››› page 14 16 ››› page 48 20 ››› page 8

7
The essentials

How it works Locking and unlocking the vehicle using the


key
Unlocking or locking the driver's door

● Locking: press the  ››› Fig. 1 button.


Opening and closing
● Unlocking: press the  ››› Fig. 1 button.
Doors ● Unlocking the rear lid: press the 
››› Fig. 1 button until all the turn signals on
the vehicle briefly light up.

Locking and unlocking with the central lock-


ing switch
● Locking: press the  ››› Fig. 2 button. The 
symbol lights up yellow to indicate that it has Fig. 3 Driver door lever: hidden lock cylinder.
been activated. None of the doors can be
opened from the outside. The doors can be If the central locking system should fail to op-
opened from the inside by pulling the inside erate, the driver door can still be locked and
door handle. unlocked by turning the key in the lock.
Fig. 1 Remote control key: buttons. ● Unlocking: Press the  ››› Fig. 2 button As a general rule, when the driver door is
again. The symbol reverts to its initial colour. locked manually all other doors are locked.
When it is unlocked manually, only the driver

 ››› in Description on page 113


door opens. Please observe the instructions
relating to the anti-theft alarm system
›››  page 119.
 ››› page 113
● Unfold the vehicle key blade
›››  page 111.
● Insert the key blade into the lower opening
in the cover on the driver door handle
››› Fig. 3 (arrow) then remove the cover up-
Fig. 2 Centre console: Central lock buttons. wards.
● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder
to unlock or lock the vehicle.

8
The essentials

Special Characteristics If the central locking system should fail to The rear lid opening system operates electri-
● The anti-theft alarm will remain active when work at any time, doors with no lock cylinder cally. It is activated by using the handle on
vehicles are unlocked. However, the alarm will have to be locked separately. the boot lid.
will not be triggered ›››  page 119. A mechanical locking device (only visible This system may or may not be operative, de-
● After the driver door is opened, you have when the door is open) is provided on the pending on the situation of the vehicle.
15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Once front passenger door.
If the rear lid is locked then it cannot be
this time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered. opened, however if it is unlocked then the
● Pull the cap out of the opening.
● Switch the ignition on. The electronic im- opening system is operative and the rear lid
● Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it
mobilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and may be opened.
to the right as far as it will go (if the door is
deactivates the anti-theft alarm system.
on the right side) or to the left (if the door is To lock/unlock, press the button  or button
on the left side).  ››› Fig. 1 on the remote control key.
Note
The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the Once the door has been closed it can no lon- A warning appears on the instrument panel
vehicle is locked manually using the key ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte- display if the rear lid is open or not properly
blade ›››  page 119. rior door handle once to unlock and open the closed.* An audible warning is also given if
door. the boot lid is opened while the vehicle is
moving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.
Manual locking of the doors with no ● Opening the rear lid: Pull on the release
lock cylinder Rear lid lever and lift it up ››› Fig. 5. The rear lid opens
automatically.
● Closing the rear lid: Hold it by one of the
handles on the interior lining and close it by
pushing gently.

›››
 in Opening and closing on
page 122

 ››› page 10

Fig. 4 Locking the door manually. Fig. 5 Rear lid: opening from the outside.

9
The essentials

Unlocking the rear lid manually Bonnet ● To lift the bonnet, press the lever under the
bonnet, in the centre, towards the left
››› Fig. 8 2 . The arrester hooks are released.
● Release the bonnet stay and secure it in
the fixture designed for this in the bonnet.

›››
 in safety notes for work in the en-
gine compartment on page 232

 ››› page 232

Fig. 6 Unlocking the rear lid manually. Fig. 7 Release lever in the driver's footwell
area. Electric windows*
This allows the vehicle to be opened if the
central locking does not work (for example, if
the battery is flat).
There is a groove in the luggage compart-
ment allowing access to the emergency
opening mechanism.

Opening the rear lid from inside the luggage


compartment
● Insert the key blade into the groove and un-
lock the locking system, turning the key from
right to left, as shown by the arrow ››› Fig. 6. Fig. 8 Lever under the bonnet.

Before opening the bonnet, make sure that


the windscreen wiper arms are in place Fig. 9 Detail of the driver door: controls for
against the windscreen. the windows.

● Open the door and pull the lever under the ● Opening the window: Press the  button.
dashboard ››› Fig. 7 1 . ● Closing the window: Pull the  button.

10
The essentials

Buttons on the driver door ● Opening: press button C backwards. 2 Raising/lowering: pull/push the lever.
1 Window on the front left door ● Closing: press button D forwards. 3 Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.
2 Window on the front right door ● To tilt open: press the rear part of button
›››
3 Window on the rear left door (only vehi-
cles with rear electric windows)
B .
● Lowering: press the front part of button A .
 in Adjusting the front seats on
page 135

4 Window on the rear right door (only vehi-

5
cles with rear electric windows)
Safety switch for deactivating the electric
 ››› in Introduction on page 124
Adjusting the head restraints
window buttons on the rear doors (only
vehicles with rear electric windows)  ››› page 124

›››
 in Opening and closing of the elec-
tric windows* on page 122
Before driving
 ››› page 122
Manually adjusting the front seats

Sliding sunroof*
Fig. 12 Front seat: adjustment of the head re-
straint.

● To raise or lower the head restraint, press


the side button 1 and move it upwards or
downwards to the desired position.

›››
 in Adjusting the front head re-
straints on page 135

Fig. 11 Front seats: manual seat adjustment.  ››› page 65, ››› page 135

Fig. 10 On the interior roof lining: sunroof


button.
1 Forward/back: pull the lever and move
the seat forwards or backwards.
11
The essentials

Adjustment of the seat belt Seat belt tensioners


During a collision, the seat belts on the front
seats are retracted automatically.
The tensioner can be triggered only once.

›››
 in Service and disposal of belt ten-
sioners on page 72

Fig. 14 Correct seat belt and head restraint


 ››› page 71

positions, viewed from front and the side.

To adjust the seat belt around your should- Adjusting the exterior mirrors
ers, adjust the height of the seats.
The shoulder part of the seat belt should be
well centred over it, never over the neck. The
seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the
upper part of the body.
The lap part of the seat belt lies across the
pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat
Fig. 13 Positioning and removing the seat
belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pel-
belt buckle.
vis.

 ››› page 68 Fig. 15 Detail of the driver door: control for


the exterior mirror.

 ››› page 70
Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob
to the corresponding position:

L/R Turning the knob to the desired posi-


tion, adjust the mirrors on the driver

12
The essentials

side (L, left) and the passenger side (R, Airbags


right) to the direction desired.
 Folding in mirrors. Front airbags
›››
 in Electric exterior mirrors* on
page 134

 ››› page 134

Adjusting the steering wheel

Fig. 18 Front passenger airbag located in


dash panel.

The front airbag for the driver is located in


the steering wheel ››› Fig. 17 and the airbag
Fig. 16 Lever in the lower left side of the Fig. 17 Driver airbag located in steering
for the front passenger is located in the dash
steering column. wheel.
panel ››› Fig. 18. Airbags are identified by the
word “AIRBAG”.
● Adjusting the position of the steering
wheel: Pull the ››› Fig. 16 1 lever down, When the driver and front passenger airbags
move the steering wheel to the desired posi- are deployed, the covers remain attached to
tion and lift the lever back up until it locks. the steering wheel and dashboard, respec-
tively ››› Fig. 17 ››› Fig. 18.
›››
 in Adjusting the steering wheel po-
sition on page 63
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front
airbag system gives the driver and the front
passenger additional protection for the head »
13
The essentials

and chest in the event of a severe frontal col- ● Insert the key blade into the slot provided
lision. in the deactivation switch.
The special design of the airbag allows the ● Approximately ¾ of the length of the key
controlled escape of the propellant gas when blade remains inserted (the maximum).
an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, ● Turn the key blade, changing its position to
the head and chest are surrounded and pro- . Do not force it. If you have difficulty, en-
tected by the airbag. After the collision, the sure that you have inserted the key as far as
airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibility. it will go.
● Finally, check the control lamp on the in-

 ››› page 74 strument panel where it shows  


   the following should appear .
Fig. 21 Illustration of completely inflated side
airbag on left side of vehicle.

›››
Deactivating the front passenger front  in Deactivation of front passenger
front airbag* on page 77
The side airbags are located in the driver's
seat and front passenger seat backrests
airbag* ››› Fig. 20. The locations are identified by the
 ››› page 76
text “AIRBAG” in the upper region of the
backrests.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the side
Side airbags* airbag system provides additional protection
for the upper body in the event of a severe
side collision.
In a side collision, the side airbags reduce
the risk of injury to passengers to the areas
of the body facing the impact. In addition to
their normal function of protecting the occu-
Fig. 19 Front passenger front airbag switch. pants in a collision, the front and rear outer
seat belts also hold the passengers in the
To deactivate the front passenger front air- event of a side collision; this is how these air-
bag: bags provide maximum protection.
● Open the door on the front passenger side.
Fig. 20 Side airbag in driver's seat.
 ››› in Side airbags* on page 75

14
The essentials

Head-protection airbags*
 ››› in Curtain airbags* on page 76

Child seats
Important information regarding the
front passenger's airbag

Fig. 22 Location and deployment area of the


head-protection airbag.

There is a head airbag on each side of the in-


terior above the doors ››› Fig. 22. Airbags are
identified by the word “AIRBAG”.
The area framed in red is covered by the
head-protection airbag when it is deployed Fig. 24 Airbag stickers - version 2: on the
››› Fig. 22 (deployment area). Therefore, ob- front passenger's sun visor  and on the rear
jects should never be placed or mounted in frame of the front passenger's door .
this area ››› in Curtain airbags* on
page 76. A sticker with important information about
the passenger airbag is located on the pas-
In the event of a side collision the curtain air-
senger's sun visor and/or on the passenger
bag is triggered on the impact side of the ve-
side door frame.
hicle.
The head-protection airbags reduce the risk ›››
of injury to passengers in the front and rear
side seats facing the impact. Fig. 23 Airbag stickers - version 1: on the
 in Important information regarding
the front passenger's airbag on page 79

front passenger's sun visor  and on the rear


frame of the front passenger's door .  ››› page 78

15
The essentials

Securing child seats


Figure ››› Fig. 25 A shows the basic child re- To adjust the passenger seat to accommo-
straint system mounting using lower retain- date a child's seat and get the seat belt in a
ing rings and the upper retaining strap. Fig- perfect position, adjust the passenger back-
ure ››› Fig. 25 B shows the child restraint rest as far forward as possible1).
system mounting using the vehicle seat belt.
If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal-
The seat belt may be used to secure univer- led, in which the method of attachment to
sal type child seats to the vehicle seats the car is through the seat belt and support
marked with a U in the table below. bracket, it should never be installed in the
central rear seat as the ground clearance is
● In the passenger seat without height ad- lower than in other places and the support
justment: It is necessary to place the passen- bracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi-
ger seat in its rearmost position 1). ciently stable.
● In the passenger seat with height adjust-
ment: It is necessary to place the passenger
seat in its rearmost and highest position 1).
To correctly use a child seat in the back, the
front backrest must be adjusted so that there
is no contact with the child seat in the back
in the case that it goes opposite to the direc-
tion of the car. In the case of front facing re-
straint systems, the front backrest must be
Fig. 25 On the rear seats: Possible installa- adjusted so that there is no contact with the
tions for the child seat. child's feet.

1) Compliance with current national legislation and

the manufacturer's instructions is required when us-


ing or installing child seats.
16
The essentials

Seating position

Weight group Front passenger seata) Rear side seat Rear central seatb)

airbag on airbag off


Group 0 to 10 kg X U* U U

Group 0+ to 13 kg X U* U U

Group I 9 to 18 kg X U* U U

Group II 15 to 25 kg X UF* UF UF

Group III 22 to 36 kg X UF* UF UF


a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.
b) For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat.

X: It is not compatible to install chairs in *: Seats without height adjustment should The systems include the child restraint sys-
this configuration. be placed in their rearmost position. tem mounting with an upper retaining strap
U: Suitable for universal restraint systems Seats with height adjustment should be (Top Tether) and lower anchoring points on
for use in this weight group. placed in their rearmost and highest po- the seat.
sition.
UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-cat-
egory child restraint systems approved
for this mass group.
 ››› in Safety instructions on page 79

17
The essentials

Retaining the child seat with the ISOFIX/iSize system and Top Tether*

Fig. 26 ISOFIX/iSize securing rings. Fig. 27 Position of the Top Tether rings on the
back of the rear seat.

Child seats can be secured quickly, easily FIX” rings are located between the rear seat To understand the compatibility of the "ISO-
and safely on the rear outer seats with the backrest and the seat cushioning ››› Fig. 26. FIX" systems in the vehicle, consult the table
“ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system. The Top Tether* rings are located on the rear below.
part of the backrests of the rear seats (be-
Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on The body weight permitted and information
hind the seat backrest or in the boot)
each rear seat. In some vehicles, the rings regarding sizes A to F is indicated on the la-
are secured to the seat frame and, in others,
››› Fig. 27. bel on child seats with “universal” or “semi-
they are secured to the rear floor. The “ISO- universal” certification.

Vehicle Isofix positions


Electrical equip-
Weight group Size class Front passenger seat
ment Rear side seat Rear central seat
airbag on airbag off
F ISO/L1 X X X X
Baby carrier
G ISO/L2 X X X X

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL X

18
The essentials

Vehicle Isofix positions


Electrical equip-
Weight group Size class Front passenger seat
ment Rear side seat Rear central seat
airbag on airbag off
E ISO/R1 X X IL X

Group 0+ to 13 kg D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

Group I 9 to 18 kg B ISO/F2 X X IUF/IL X

B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF/IL X

A ISO/F3 X X IUF/IL X

Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- --- ---

Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- --- ---

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX uni- vehicle, restricted or semi-universal cat-
versal child restraint systems approved
for use in this mass group.
egories. Please note the list of vehicles
from the child seat manufacturer.
 ››› in Safety instructions on page 79

IL: Suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX
systems (CRS) that can be of the specific child restraint systems for this weight
group or size class.

19
The essentials

Retaining the child seat with the “ISOFIX/i-Size” ISOFIX System


You are obliged to follow the seat manufac- to the correspondent ring ››› Fig. 29. Observe
turer's instructions. the manufacturer's instructions.
● Pull on both sides of the child seat to en-
● Remove the protective caps of the “ISO-
sure that it is properly anchored.
FIX/iSize” rings by placing a finger in the
hole and pulling up ››› Fig. 28. Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*
● Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re- attachment system are available from Techni-
taining rings until the child seat can be heard cal Services.
to engage securely. If the child seat is equip-
ped with Top Tether* anchor points, secure it
Fig. 28 ISOFIX/iSize securing rings.

Vehicle i-Size positions

Front passenger seat


Rear side seat Rear central seat
airbag on airbag off
Child restraint system approved under ECE R129 X X i-U X

i-U Valid position for front-facing and rear-


facing child restraint systems approved
under ECE R129.
X: Invalid position for child restraint sys-
tems approved under ECE R129.

20
The essentials

Attachment of the child seat with the Securing the Top Tether* to the an- structions of the chair itself, lift or remove the
Top Tether retainer straps* chorage point head restraint if necessary).
● Slide the strap and secure it properly with
the anchorage of the backrest ››› Fig. 29.
● Firmly tighten the strap following the manu-
facturer's instructions.

Releasing the retaining strap


● Loosen the strap following the manufactur-
er's instructions.
● Push the lock and release it from the an-
choring support.
Fig. 29 Position of the Top Tether rings on the
back of the rear seat.
 ››› in Safety instructions on page 79

Child seats with the Top Tether system come


with a strap for securing the seat to the vehi-
cle anchor point, located at the back of the
rear seat backrest and provide greater re-
straint.
The objective of this strap is to reduce for-
ward movements of the child seat in a crash,
to reduce the risk of injuries to the head from Fig. 30 Retainer strap: adjustment and as-
hitting the inside of the vehicle. sembly according to the Top Tether belt.

Securing the retainer strap


Using the Top Tether in rear-facing mounted
seats ● Follow the manufacturer's instructions to
deploy the child seat Top Tether retainer
Currently, there are very few rear-facing child
strap.
safety seats that have Top Tether. Please
carefully read and follow the seat manufac- ● Place the belt under the head restraint of
turer instructions to learn the proper way to the back seat ››› Fig. 30 (depending on the in-
install the Top Tether strap.
21
The essentials

Starting the vehicle Turning on/switching off the ignition, glow Lights and visibility
plugs reheating
Ignition lock ● Switch ignition on: Turn the key to the 2 Light switch
position.
● Switch ignition off. Turn the key to the 1
position.
● Diesel vehicles : The glow plugs reheat
when the ignition is switched on.

Starting the engine


● Manual gearbox: press the clutch pedal all
the way down and move the gearbox lever in-
to neutral.
Fig. 31 Ignition key positions. ● Automatic gearbox: Press the brake pedal Fig. 32 Dash panel: light control.
and move the selector lever to the P position
Switch ignition on: Place the key in the igni- or into N. ● Turn the switch to the required position
tion and start the engine. ● Turn the key to the 3 position. The key au- ››› Fig. 32.
tomatically returns to the 2 position. Do not
Locking and unlocking the steering wheel press the accelerator. Sym- Ignition switch- Ignition is switch-
● Engaging the steering wheel lock: Remove bol ed off ed on
the key from the ignition and turn the wheel Start-Stop System* Fog lights, dipped
until it locks. In vehicles with an automatic Light off or daytime
When you stop and release the clutch pedal,  beam and side
driving light on.
gearbox, the gear lever must be in the P posi- the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine. lights off.
tion in order to remove the key. If necessary, The ignition remains switched on. The “Coming home”
press the locking key on the selector lever and “Leaving Automatic control of
and release it again. ››› 
● Unlocking the steering wheel: Put the key
into the ignition and turn it at the same time
 in Ignition key positions on
page 156
home” guide lights
may be switched
on.
dipped beam and day-
time running light.

as the steering wheel in the direction indica-


ted by the arrow. If it is not possible to turn
 ››› page 155
 Side light on.
Daylight running
lights switched on.
the steering wheel, it may be because it is
locked.
22
The essentials

Sym- Ignition switch- Ignition is switch- 1 Right turn signal: Right-hand parking ● When approaching a traffic jam
bol ed off ed on light (ignition switched off). ● In an emergency
2 Left turn signal: Left-hand parking light ● The vehicle has broken down
Dipped beam head- Dipped beam switch-
 (ignition switched off).
light off ed on. ● When towing or being towed
3 Main beam switched on: Control lamp 
 Front fog lights: move the switch to the lit up on the instrument panel. ›››
first position, from positions ,  or . 4 Headlight flasher: lit up when the lever is
pushed. Control lamp  lit up.
 in Hazard warning lights  on
page 131
 Rear fog light: move the switch completely
from positions ,  or .
Lever all the way down to switch it off.  ››› page 130

Switching off fog lights: Push the switch or


turn it to the  position. ›››
 in Turn signal and main beam lever
on page 129 Interior lights
 ››› page 127
 ››› page 128

Turn signal and main beam lever Hazard warning lights

Fig. 35 Detail of headliner: front interior light-


ing.

Knob Function

Fig. 33 Turn signal and main beam lever.


 Switches interior lights off.
Fig. 34 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn-
ing lights.  Switches interior lights on. »
More the lever to the required position:
Switched on, for example:
23
The essentials

Knob Function Windscreen wipers and window wiper More the lever to the required position:
blade
Switches door contact control on (central 2  Slow wipe.
position).
The interior lights come on automatically 3  Continuous wipe.
when the vehicle is unlocked, a door is
 opened or the key is removed from the igni- 4  Short wipe. Brief press, short clean.
tion.
The lights go off a few seconds after all the Automatic wipe. The windscreen washer
doors are closed, the vehicle is locked or function is activated by pushing the lever
the ignition is switched on.
5  forwards, and simultaneously the wind-
screen wipers start.
 Turning the reading light on and off
Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper
The light controls may vary depending on the 6  will wipe the window approximately every
six seconds.
vehicle version. Fig. 36 Operating the windscreen wiper and
rear wiper. The rear window wash function is activa-
 ted by pressing the lever, and the rear wip-

7
››› page 131 er starts simultaneously.
More the lever to the required position:

 ›››
0 Windscreen wiper off.

Windscreen wipers interval wipe.


 in Windscreen wipers and window
wiper blade on page 132

Using the control ››› Fig. 36 A adjust the


1  interval (vehicles without rain sensor), or
the sensitivity of the rain sensor.
 ››› page 132

 ››› page 59

24
The essentials

Easy Connect
CAR menu settings (Setup)

Fig. 37 Easy Connect: Main menu. Fig. 38 Easy Connect: CAR menu.

To select the settings menus, press the Easy ● Press the system's  button and then When you press the menu button, the last se-
Connect  button and the Setup function the function button Vehicle ››› Fig. 37, or the lected menu will always be displayed.
button. system's  button to go to the menu Vehi-
When the function button checkbox is activa-
cle ››› Fig. 38.
The actual number of menus available and ted , the function is active.
the name of the various options will depend ● Press the function button SETUP to open
the menu Vehicle settings ››› Fig. 38. Any changes made using the settings menus
on the vehicle’s electronics and equipment.
are automatically saved on closing the
● To select a function in the menu, press the BACK  menus.
● Switch the ignition on.
desired button.
● If the Infotainment System is off, switch it
on.

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description


ESC system – Activation of the Electronic Stability Programme (ESC) ››› page 164
Tyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) ››› page 247
Tyres
Winter tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning. Setting the speed warning value ››› page 249 »
25
The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description


Front Assist system Activation/deactivation: Front Assist system, pre-warning, distance warning display ››› page 183
Driver assistance ACC (adaptive cruise control) Activation/deactivation: default distance level, driving profiles. ››› page 189
Fatigue detection Activation/deactivation ››› page 200
Parking and manoeu- Automatically activate, front volume, front sound settings, rear volume, rear sound set-
vring
ParkPilot
tings, adjust volume
››› page 201

Vehicle interior lighting Instrument and switch lighting, footrest lighting ››› page 131
Vehicle lights
Coming home/Leaving home func‐
tion
Start time for “Coming home” function, start time for “Leaving home” function ››› page 129

Windscreen wipers Windscreen wipers Automatic windscreen wipers, wipe when reversing ››› page 24
Radio-operated remote control Convenience open function ››› page 123
Opening and closing
Unlocking doors, automatic locking/unlocking, audible confirmation, switching off
Central locking system
alarm
››› page 113

Current consumption, average consumption, volume to fill up, convenience consum-


ers, ECOAdvice, travelling time, distance travelled, digital speed display, average
Multifunction display – ››› page 27
speed, speeding warning, oil temperature, coolant temperature, restore data “from
start”, restore data “total calculation”

Time source, set the time, automatic summer time (DST) setting, select time zone,
Date and time – –
time format, set the date, date format

Measurement units – Distance, speed, temperature, volume, consumption –

Service – Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change service ››› page 32
All settings can be reset: driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring, lights, rear view
Factory settings – –
mirrors, opening and closing, multi-function display

26
The essentials

lever button or the multifunction steering Operating the instrument panel me-
 ››› in CAR menu on page 105 wheel button. nus
The information system also provides the fol-
 ››› page 105 lowing information and displays (depending
on the vehicle's equipment):

Driving data ››› page 30


Driver information system ■ Vehicle status
■ MFD from departure
Introduction ■ MFD from refuelling
■ MFD total calculation
With the ignition switched on, it is possible
to read the different functions of the display Assist systems ››› table on page 28
by scrolling through the menus. Fig. 39 Windscreen wiper lever: control but-
■Reverse (optional) tons.
In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel, Navigation ››› Booklet Navigation system
the multifunction display can only be operat-
ed with the steering wheel buttons. Audio ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Naviga-
tion system
The number of menus displayed on the in-
strument panel will vary according to the ve- Telephone ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Book-
hicle electronics and equipment. let Navigation system
A specialised workshop will be able to pro- Vehicle ››› table on page 28
gramme or modify additional functions, ac-
cording to the vehicle equipment. SEAT rec- WARNING
ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service. Any distraction may lead to an accident, with
Some menu options can only be read when the risk of injury.
Fig. 40 Right side of multifunction steering
the vehicle is at a standstill. ● Do not operate the instrument panel con- wheel: control buttons.
trols when driving.
As long as a priority 1 warning is displayed, it
The driver information system is controlled
will not be possible to read the menus. Some
with the multifunction steering wheel buttons
warning messages can be confirmed and
made to disappear with the windscreen wiper
››› Fig. 40 or with the windscreen wiper lever
››› Fig. 39 (if the vehicle is not equipped with
multifunction steering wheel). »
27
The essentials

Enabling the main menu Making changes according to the menu Menu Function
● Switch the ignition on. ● Make the desired changes with the rocker
Station display on the radio.
● If a message or vehicle pictogram appears, switch on the windscreen wiper lever or the
Track name on the CD.
press button ››› Fig. 39 1 on the windscreen thumbwheel of the multifunction steering Audio Track name in Media mode ››› Book-
wiper lever or button  on the multifunction wheel. To increase or decrease the values let Radio or ››› Booklet Navigation sys-
steering wheel ››› Fig. 40. more quickly, turn the thumbwheel faster. tem.

● If managed from the windscreen wiper lev- ● Mark or confirm the selection with button Information and possible configura-
er: to display the main screen ››› page 28 or ››› Fig. 39 1 on the windscreen wiper lever tions of the mobile phone preinstalla-
Telephone
to return to the main menu from another or button  on the multifunction steering tion ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Nav-
menu hold down the rocker button ››› Fig. 39 wheel ››› Fig. 40. igation system.

2 . Display of the current warning or infor-


● If managed from the multifunction steering Vehicle mation texts and other system compo-
wheel: the main menu list is not displayed. Menu status nents, depending on the equipment
››› page 105.
To go from point to point in the main menu,
press button   or   several times Menu Function
››› Fig. 40. Information and possible configura-
Driving Outside temperature display
tions of the multifunction display (MFD)
Select a submenu data
››› page 30, ››› page 105.
When the outside temperature is below +4°C
● Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 39 2 on the Information and possible configura- (+39°F), the  symbol (warning of risk of
windscreen wiper lever up or down or turn Assist
systems
tions of the driver assistance systems freezing) is also displayed. At first, this sym-
the thumbwheel of the multifunction steering ››› page 105. bol flashes and then it remains lit until the
wheel ››› Fig. 40 until the desired option ap- outside temperature rises above +6 °C
Information instructions from the acti-
pears marked on the menu. vated navigation system: when a route (+43 °F) ››› in Indications on the display on
● The selected option is displayed with a hor- guidance is activated, the turning ar- page 102.
izontal line underneath. rows and proximity bars are displayed.
The appearance is similar to the Easy When the vehicle is at a standstill or when
● To consult the submenu option, press but- Naviga- travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-
Connect system.
ton ››› Fig. 39 1 on the windscreen wiper tion*
If route guidance is not activated, the ture displayed may be higher than the true
lever or button  on the multifunction steer- direction of travel (compass) and the outside temperature as a result of the heat
ing wheel ››› Fig. 40. name of the street along which you are produced by the engine.
driving are shown ››› Booklet Naviga-
tion system. The temperatures measured range from
-40 °C to +50 °C (-40 °F to +122 °F).
28
The essentials

Gear-change indicator Bonnet, rear lid and doors open Illustra-


Key to ››› Fig. 42
tion
 Do not continue driving!
A The bonnet is open or is not properly
closed ››› page 232.

 Do not continue driving!


B The rear lid is open or is not properly
closed ››› page 9.

 Do not continue driving!


C, D A vehicle door is open or is not properly
closed ››› page 113.
Fig. 41 Instrument panel: gear-change indica-
tor (manual gearbox).
Warning and information messages
Gear recommendation
The recommended gear for saving fuel may The system runs a check on certain compo-
be indicated on the dash screen during driv- nents and functions when the ignition is
ing ›››  page 170. switched on and while the vehicle is moving.
Faults in the operation are displayed on the
screen using red and yellow symbols and
messages on the instrument panel display
Fig. 42 A: bonnet open; B: rear lid open; C: (›››  page 104, ››› page 36) and, in
front left door open; D: rear right door open some cases, with audible warnings. The dis-
(5-door vehicles only). play may vary according to the type of instru-
ment panel fitted.
When the ignition is switched on or when
driving, the bonnet, rear lid or doors that are Priority 1 warning (red symbols)
open will be indicated on the instrument pan-
el display, and, as applicable, this will be in- Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible
dicated audibly. The display may vary accord- warnings.
 Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous ››› in Warning
ing to the type of instrument panel fitted. symbols on page 104!
Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If necessa-
ry, request assistance from specialised personnel. »
29
The essentials

Priority 2 warning (yellow symbols) Changing between display modes on the Menu Function
MFD
Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible Display and storage of the values for
● In vehicles without multifunction steering
warnings. the journey and the consumption
A faulty function, or fluids which are below the correct wheel: Press the rocker switch  on the from when the ignition is switched
levels may cause damage to the vehicle! ››› in Warn- windscreen wiper lever ››› Fig. 39. on to when it is switched off.
ing symbols on page 105 ● Vehicles with a multifunction steering If the journey is continued in less
MFD from de-
Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If neces- than 2 hours after the ignition is
sary, request assistance from specialised personnel.
wheel: turn the thumbwheel ››› Fig. 40. parture
switched off, the new data is added
to the data already stored in the
Multifunction display memory memory. The memory will automati-
Informative text cally be deleted if the journey is in-
The multifunction display is equipped with terrupted for more than 2 hours.
Information relating to different vehicle processes. three memories that work automatically: MFD
from departure, MFD from refuelling and MFD Display and storage of the values for
total calculation. On the screen display, you MFD from re- the journey and the consumption.
can read which memory is currently dis- fuelling By refuelling, the memory will be
Assist systems submenu erased automatically.
played.
The memory records the values for a
Assist
systems Function Toggle between memories with the ignition specific number of partial trips, up
on and the memory displayed to a total of 19 hours and 59 mi-
menu nutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes,
Press the  button on the windscreen MFD total or 1999.9 km or 9999 km, depend-
Switching the fatigue detection on wiper lever or the  button of the multifunc- calculation ing on the model of instrument pan-
Fatigue de-
or off (pause recommendation) el. On reaching either of these lim-
tection*
››› page 200. tion steering wheel.
itsa), the memory is automatically
erased and starts to count from 0
again.

Journey data a) It varies according to the instrument panel version.

Erasing a memory manually


Memory
● Select the memory that you wish to erase.
The MFD (multifunction display) shows differ- ● Hold the  button of the multifunction
ent values for the journey and the consump- steering wheel or the  button of the multi-
tion. function wheel pressed down for about 2 sec-
onds.
30
The essentials

Personalising the displays Menu Function by turning the thumbwheel on the multifunc-
In the Easy Connect system you can adjust tion steering wheel. Next, press the button
Distance cov- Distance covered in km (m) after  or  again or wait several seconds.
which of the possible displays of the MFD can
ered switching on the ignition. The speed is stored and the warning activa-
be shown on the instrument panel display
with the button  and the function button The average speed will be shown ted.
Setup ›››  page 105. after a distance of about 300 me- ● To switch system off: press the but-
tres has been travelled. Otherwise ton  or  . The stored speed is de-
Average speed
horizontal lines are displayed.
leted.
The value shown is updated ap-
Data summary proximately every 5 seconds.

Digital dis- Current speed displayed in digital


Engine oil temperature display
Menu Function play of speed format.

The current fuel consumption dis- If the stored speed is exceeded The engine reaches its operating temperature
Speed warning
play operates throughout the (between 30 - 250 km/h, or 19 - when in normal driving conditions, the oil
Current fuel at --- km/h or
journey, in litres/100 km; and 155 mph), an audible warning is temperature is between 80°C (178°F) and
consumption Speed warning
with the engine running and the given together with a visual warn- 120°C (248°F). If the engine is required to
at --- mph
vehicle stopped, in litres/hour. ing.
work hard and the outside temperature is
After turning on the ignition, aver- Oil tempera- Updated engine oil temperature high, the engine oil temperature can in-
age fuel consumption in li- ture digital display crease. This does not present any problem as
tres/100 km will be displayed af- long as the warning lamps  ››› table on
Coolant tem- Digital display of the current tem-
Average fuel ter travelling about 300 metres.
perature gauge perature of the liquid coolant.
page 37 or  ››› table on page 37 do not
consumption Otherwise horizontal lines are appear on the display.
displayed. The value shown is up-
dated approximately every 5 sec- Storing a speed with the speed warning
onds. Vehicles without multifunction steering
● Select the display Speed warning at wheel
Approximate distance in km that --- km/h (--- mph)
can still be travelled with the fuel
● Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 39 2 until
Operating remaining in the tank, assuming ● Press the button  on the windscreen the main menu appears. Enter into Driving
range the same style of driving is main- wiper lever or the button  on the multifunc- data. With the button 2 move to the oil
tained. This is calculated using tion steering wheel to store the current speed temperature gauge. »
the current fuel consumption. and activate the warning.
This indicates the hours (h) and ● To switch system on: adjust to the desired
Travelling
time
minutes (min) since the ignition speed within 5 seconds using the rocker
was switched on. switch  on the windscreen wiper lever or
31
The essentials

Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel If you wish to hide a saving tip immediately ● Vehicles with radio: press the button SETUP
● Enter the submenu Driving data and after it appears, press any button on the > control button  Driver Assistant >
turn the thumbwheel until the oil tempera- windscreen wiper lever*/multifunction steer- Speed warning.
ture display appears. ing wheel*. ● Vehicles with Easy Connect: press the but-
ton Systems or else Vehicle systems >
Note Driver assistant > Speed warning.
Additional electrical appliances ● If you hide a saving tip, it will reappear af-
ter you switch the ignition on again. The warning limit can be set from 30 to
● Operation with the windscreen wiper lever*:
240 km/h (20 to 149 mph). The adjustment
● The saving tips do not appear in all situa-
is made at 10 km/h (5 mph) intervals.
Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 39 2 until the tions, but rather with a large separation of
main menu appears. Enter into the section time.
Note
Driving data. With the rocker switch,
move to the display Convenience con- ● Please bear in mind that, even with the
sumers. speed warning function, it is still important
Speed warning device
to keep an eye on the vehicle speed with the
● Operation with the multi-function steering
speedometer and to observe the legal speed
wheel*: Move with the buttons 1 or 2 to The speed warning device warns the driver
limits.
Driving data and enter with OK. Turn the when they have exceeded the pre-set speed
● The speed limit warning function in the ver-
right thumbwheel until the Convenience limit by 3 km/h (2 mph). An audible warning
sion for some countries warns you at a speed
consumers display appears. signal sounds, and the warning lamp  and
of 120 km/h (75 mph). This is a factory-set
the driver message Speed limit excee-
speed limit.
In addition, a scale will inform you of the cur- ded! will be displayed simultaneously on the
rent sum of all the additional appliances. instrument panel. The warning lamp 
switches off when reducing speed below the
stored maximum limit. Service intervals
Saving tips Speed warning programming is recommen- The service interval indication appears on the
ded if you wish to be reminded of a maxi- instrument panel display ›››  Fig. 106 3 .
Tips on how to save fuel will be displayed in
mum speed, such as when travelling in a
conditions that increase fuel consumption. SEAT distinguishes between services with en-
country with different speed limits or for a
Follow them to reduce consumption. The indi- gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and
maximum speed for winter tyres.
cations appear automatically only with the ef- services without engine oil change (e.g. In-
ficiency programme. After a time, the tips will spection).
Setting speed limit warning
disappear automatically.
You can use the radio or the Easy Connect* to
set, alter or cancel the speed limit warning.
32
The essentials

In vehicles with Services established by time the display mode changes. A clock symbol Resetting service interval display
or mileage, the service intervals are already appears and the number of days until the If the service was not carried out by a SEAT
pre-defined. next service is due. dealership, the display can be reset as fol-
In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter- Vehicles with text messages: Service in lows:
vals are determined individually. Thanks to --- km or --- days will be shown on the
● Switch off the ignition, press and hold but-
technological progress, maintenance work instrument panel display.
has been greatly reduced. Because of the ton ›››  Fig. 106 4 .
technology used by SEAT, with this service Service due ● Switch ignition back on.
you only need to change the oil when the ve- ● Release the 4 ›››  Fig. 106 button and
When the service date is due, an audible
hicle so requires. To calculate this change press it again for the next 20 seconds.
warning is given when the ignition is switch-
(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of
ed on and the spanner displayed on the
use and individual driving styles are consid- Note
screen flashes for a few seconds .
ered. The advance warning first appears 20
● The service message disappears after a few
days before the date established for the cor- Vehicles with text messages: Service now
seconds, when the engine is started or when
responding service. The kilometres (miles) will be shown on the instrument panel dis-
OK/RESET is pressed on the windscreen wiper
remaining until the next service are always play.
lever, or OK on the multifunction steering
rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) wheel.
and the time is given in complete days. The Reading a service notification
● In vehicles with the LongLife system in
current service message cannot be viewed With the ignition switched on, the engine off which the battery has been disconnected for
until 500 km after the last service. Prior to and the vehicle at a standstill, the current a long period of time, it is not possible to cal-
this, only lines are visible on the display. service notification can be read: culate the date of the next service. Therefore
the service interval display may not be cor-
Inspection reminder Press and hold the button 4 for more than 5 rect. In this case, bear in mind the maximum
seconds to consult the service message. service intervals permitted in the ››› Book-
When the Service date is approaching, when
When the service date has passed, a minus let Maintenance Programme.
the ignition is switched on a Service remind-
er is displayed. sign is displayed in front of the number of kil- ● If you reset the display manually, the next
ometres or days. service interval will be indicated as in vehi-
Vehicles without text messages: a span- cles with fixed service intervals. For this rea-
ner  will be displayed on the instrument Vehicles with text messages: the following son we recommend that the service interval
panel plus an indication in km. message is displayed: Service --- km display be reset by a SEAT authorised Dealer.
(miles) or --- days ago.
The kilometres indicated are the maximum
number of kilometres that can be travelled The time can also be set via the  button
until the next service. After a few seconds, and Setup function button in the Easy Con-
nect system ›››  page 105.
33
The essentials

Cruise control
Operating the cruise control system (CCS)*

Fig. 43 On the left of the steering column: Fig. 44 On the left of the steering column:
control and buttons for operating the cruise third lever for operating the cruise control.
control.

Position of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 43


Function Effect
or the third lever ››› Fig. 44
Switching on the cruise control sys- Move control 1 to the  position of the turn signal lever or move the third lever The system switches on. The last set speed of the
tem forward. cruise control is stored. It does not take effect yet.

Switching on the cruise control sys- The current speed is stored and the cruise control is
Press button 3 on the turn signal lever or button  1 on the third lever.
tem. switched on.

Temporarily switching off the cruise Move control 1 of the turn signal lever into position  or move the third lever The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will
control. into pressure point . be stored.

Switching the cruise control system Press button 3 on the turn signal lever or move the third lever into pressure point
Cruise control switches on at the set speed.
back on. .

34
The essentials

Position of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 43


Function Effect
or the third lever ››› Fig. 44
Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area  or press  1 on
the third lever to increase the speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set
it.
Increasing the set speed of the cruise
Press  on the third lever to increase the speed in increments of 10 km/h The speed is adjusted to the set value.
control
(5 mph) and set it.

Hold down button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area  or hold down  to
increase continuously in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area  or move the third
lever into position  to reduce the speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph)
and set it.
Reducing the set speed of the cruise
Press  on the third lever to reduce the speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) The speed is adjusted to the set value.
control
and set it.

Hold down button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area  or hold down  to
reduce continuously in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Switching off the cruise control sys- Move control 1 of the turn signal lever into position  or the third lever into posi-
The system switches off. The set speed will be stored.
tem tion .

 ››› in Operation on page 178

 ››› page 178

35
The essentials

Warning lamps
On the instrument panel

Fig. 45 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Red warning lamps Lit up or flashing: Yellow warning lamps


››› page
Central warning lamp: additional   Do not continue driving!
154 Central warning lamp: additional
Fault in the steering.
 information on the instrument pan- –  information on the instrument pan- –
el display Driver or passenger has not fas- ››› page el display
 tened seat belt. 67
 Parking brake on. ››› page
 Do not continue driving!
161  Use the foot brake!
››› page
 The brake fluid level is too low or
162
there is a fault in the brake system.
36
The essentials

 Front brake pads worn. Other warning lamps On the instrument panel display
it lights up: Fault in the ESC, or dis- Left or right turn signal.
››› page
23
connection caused by the system.
 ››› page

flashes: ESC or ASR activated.
››› page
164 Hazard warning lights on.
130
ASR manually deactivated.
 Or else: ESC in Sport mode.  Trailer turn signals
››› page
209
 ABS faulty or does not work.
it lights up: Press the foot brake!
››› page  flashes: the selector lever locking
 Rear fog light switched on.
22 button has not engaged.

lights up or flashes: fault in the ››› page it lights up: cruise control activated
 emission control system. 174 or speed limiter switched on and ››› page
active. 34
it lights up: pre-heating of diesel
 ››› page
engine. flashes: the speed set by the 180
››› page speed limiter has been exceeded.
 174
flashes: fault in the diesel engine Fig. 46 On the instrument panel display: door
››› page
management.  Main beam on or flasher on.
23 open.
fault in the petrol engine manage- ››› page
 ment. 174 ››› page
 Do not continue driving!
113
lights up or flashes: fault in the ››› page With the corresponding indica-
  tion: door(s), rear lid or bonnet
››› page 9
steering system. 154 ››› page
open or not properly closed.
232
Tyre pressure too low, or fault in
››› page
 the tyre pressure monitoring sys-
247 Ignition:  Do not carry on driv-
tem. ing! Engine coolant level too low,
coolant temperature too high ››› page
 Fuel tank almost empty.
››› page  238
104 Flashing: Fault in the engine
coolant system.
Fault in airbag system and seat ››› page
 belt tensioners. 72  Do not continue driving! ››› page
 Engine oil pressure too low. 235 »

37
The essentials

 Fault in the battery.


››› page
 Low consumption driving status
››› page Gearbox lever
241 28

Driving light totally or partially ››› page Manual gearbox


faulty. 91
 On the instrument panel
Fault in the cornering light sys- ››› page
tem. 127

 Particulate filter blocked.

Flashing: Fault in the oil level de-


tection. Control manually. ››› page
 235
Ignition: Insufficient engine oil.

 Fault in the gearbox.

››› page Fig. 48 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed


 Immobiliser active.
156 manual gearbox.
››› page Fig. 47 Warning lamp for disabling the front
 Service interval display passenger airbag. The position of the gears is indicated on the
32
gearbox lever ››› Fig. 48.
Mobile telephone is connected ››› Book- Front passenger front airbag is
 via Bluetooth to the original tele- let Radio ››› page ● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot
phone device. or   disabled (  
76 right down.
››› Book-  ).
● Move the gearbox lever to the required po-
Mobile telephone battery charge let Navi-
The front passenger front airbag ››› page sition.
 meter. Available only for devices gation
pre-installed in factory. system   is activated (   76
● Release the clutch.
 ).
Freezing warning. The outside
››› page Selecting reverse gear
 temperature is lower than +4 °C
(+39 °F).
28
 ››› in Warning symbols on page 104 ● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot
right down.
 Start-Stop system activated.

 Start-Stop system unavailable.


››› page
175  ››› page 104 ● With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it
downwards, move it to the left as far as it will
go and then forwards to select reverse
››› Fig. 48 R .
38
The essentials

● Release the clutch.


›››
 in Driving with manual gearbox on
page 170

 ››› page 170

Air conditioning
How does Climatronic* work?

Fig. 49 In the centre console: Climatronic con-


trols

To switch a specific function on, press the ap- The LED on each control lights up to indicate
propriate button. Press the button again to that the respective function of a control has
switch off the function. been switched on.

1
The left and right sides can be adjusted separately: turn the control to adjust the temperature. »
Temperature

39
The essentials

2
The power of the fan is automatically adjusted. Rotate the buttons to manually adjust the fan.
Fan

3
The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. You can also switch it on manually using the buttons 3 .
Air distribution

4 Indications on the temperature display screen selected for the right and left sides and fan speed.

 The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is automatically switched off. To defrost the wind-
Defrost function screen more quickly, the air is dehumidified at temperatures over approximately +3 °C (+38 °F) and the fan runs at maximum output.

 The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.

 Air distribution towards the footwell.

 Upward air distribution.

 Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.

 Air recirculation

 Seat heating buttons

 Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

Press the  button to apply the settings on the driver side to the passenger side. Actuate the temperature control for the passenger side in
 order to set a different temperature.

 Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, and air distribution.

Switching off Press the  button or set the fan manually to .

 ››› in General notes on page 145

 ››› page 152

40
The essentials

How does the manual air conditioning work*?

Fig. 50 In the centre console: Manual air condi-


tioning controls.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap- The LED on each control lights up to indicate
propriate button. Press the button again to that the respective function of a control has
switch off the function. been switched on.

1
Turn the control to adjust the temperature.
Temperature

2 Setting 0: blower and manual air conditioning switched off


Fan Level 4: maximum fan level. »

41
The essentials

: Defrost function. The airflow is directed at the windscreen. Air recirculation is automatically switched off or is not switched on. Increase the
fan power to clear the windscreen of condensation as soon as possible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling system will automatically switch on.

3 : The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vent.
Air distribution
: Air distribution to footwell.
 – Air distribution to the windscreen and the footwell.
 Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.

 Air recirculation

 Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

 Seat heating buttons

 ››› in General notes on page 145

 ››› page 150

42
The essentials

How does the heating and the fresh air system work?

Fig. 51 In the centre console: heating system and


fresh air controls.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap- The LED on each control lights up to indicate
propriate button. Press the button again to that the respective function of a control has
switch off the function. been switched on.

1 Turn the control to adjust the temperature. The temperature cannot be lower than that of the exterior air temperature as this system cannot cool
Temperature or dehumidify the air

2 Setting 0: blower and manual air conditioning switched off


Fan Level 4: maximum fan level.

: Defrost function. The airflow is directed at the windscreen.

3
: The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vent.
Air distribution
: Air distribution to footwell.
 – Air distribution to the windscreen and the footwell. »
43
The essentials

 Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.

 Air recirculation

 ››› in General notes on page 145

 ››› page 148

44
The essentials

Fluid Level control Opening the fuel tank cap


● Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the
Filling capacities left side.
● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.
Capacities ● Place it in the space on the hinge of the
Fuel tank 40 litres. 7 litre re- open flap ››› Fig. 52.
serve.
Closing the fuel tank cap
Windscreen washer fluid con- 3 litres
tainer ● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as
far as it will go. Fig. 54 In the engine compartment: Engine
● Close the lid. oil filler cap.

Fuel The level is measured using the dipstick loca-


 ››› in Refuelling on page 230 ted in the engine compartment
›››  page 235.
 ››› page 230 The oil should leave a mark between zones
A and C . It should never exceed zone A .

● Zone A : Do not add oil.


Oil ● Zone B : You can add oil but keep the level
in that zone.
● Zone C : Add oil up to zone B .

Fig. 52 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached. Topping up engine oil
● Unscrew cap from oil filler opening.
The tank flap is released electronically by
● Add oil slowly.
means of the central locking and is located at
the rear of the vehicle on the right. The tank ● At the same time, check the level to ensure
holds approximately 40 litres. you do not add too much.
● When the oil level reaches at least zone B ,
Fig. 53 Engine oil dipstick.
unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully. »
45
The essentials

Oil properties Coolant even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-


tection is not required.
Engine type Specification
If for weather reasons further protection is
Petrol without flexible serv- VW 502 00/VW 504 00 necessary, the proportion of additive may be
ice interval increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-
Petrol with flexible service VW 504 00/VW 508 00 tifreeze protection will diminish and this will
interval (LongLife) worsen cooling.
Diesel. Engines without Par- VW 505 01/VW 506 01/ When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture
ticulate filter (DPF) VW 507 00 of distilled water and at least 40 % of the
G13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive
Diesel. Particulate Filter En- VW 507 00
gines (DPF).
(both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti-
With or without flexible corrosion protection ››› in Topping up cool-
Fig. 55 Engine compartment: coolant expan-
service interval (with and sion tank cap. ant on page 240. The mixture of G13 with
without LongLife)a) G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11
a) The coolant tank is located in the engine (green-blue) engine coolants will significant-
Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the
engine. compartment ›››  page 235. ly reduce anti-corrosion protection and
should therefore be avoided ››› in Topping
When the engine is cold, replace the coolant up coolant on page 240.
Engine oil additives when the level is below .
No type of additive should be mixed with the
engine oil. The deterioration caused by these
additives is not covered by the warranty.
Coolant specifications  ››› in Topping up coolant on page 239

The engine cooling system is supplied from


the factory with a specially treated mixture of  ››› page 238

 ››› in Changing engine oil on page 238 water and at least 40 % of the additive G13
(TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the

 ››› page 235 necessary frost protection down to -25 °C


(-13 °F) and protects the light alloy parts of
the engine cooling system against corrosion.
It also prevents scaling and considerably rai-
ses the boiling point of the coolant.
To protect the cooling system, the percentage
of additive must always be at least 40 %,

46
The essentials

Brake fluid Windscreen washer maintenance. It is checked as part of the In-


spection Service.

›››
 in Symbols and warnings on han-
dling the battery on page 241

 ››› page 241

Fig. 56 Engine compartment: brake fluid res- Fig. 57 In the engine compartment: wind-
ervoir cap. screen washer reservoir top.

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en- The windscreen washer reservoir is located in
gine compartment ›››  page 235. the engine compartment ›››  page 235.
The level should be between the  and  To top up, mix water with a product recom-
marks. If it is below , please visit a Techni- mended by SEAT.
cal Service.
In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze for win-
dows.
›››
 in Changing the brake fluid on
page 240
››› in Checking and topping up the

 ››› page 240  windscreen washer reservoir water on


page 241

 ››› page 241

Battery
The battery is located in the engine compart-
ment ›››  page 235. It does not require
47
The essentials

Emergencies Opening and closing the fuse box situated


below the dash panel
Colour Amp rating
Green 30
● Opening: remove the fuse box cover in the
Fuses direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 58. Orange 40
● Closing: click the cover back into place.
Fuse location
To open the engine compartment fuse box  ››› in Introduction on page 88

● Raise the bonnet.


● Press the locking tabs to release the fuse  ››› page 88

box cover ››› Fig. 59


● Then lift the cover out.
● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. Replacing a blown fuse
Push the locking tabs down until they click
audibly into place.

Fig. 58 On the driver-side dash panel: fuse Identifying fuses situated below the dash
box cover. panel by colours

Colour Amp rating


Black 1

Purple 3

Light brown 5
Fig. 60 Image of a blown fuse.
Brown 7.5
Preparation
Red 10
● Switch off the ignition, lights and all elec-
Blue 15 trical equipment.
Fig. 59 In the engine compartment: fuse box Yellow 20 ● Open the corresponding fuse box
cover. ›››  page 89.
White or transparent 25

48
The essentials

Identifying a blown fuse Halogen headlight with DRL Type ● Automatic gearbox: Move the selector lever
A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured LED to position P.
››› Fig. 60. ● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from
Dipped beam headlights H7 Long Life
your vehicle.
● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has
Main beam headlights H7 ● Have the vehicle tool kit* ››› page 51 and
blown.
the spare wheel ›››  page 248 ready.
Turn signal PY 21W
To replace a fuse ● Observe the applicable legislation for each
DRL (day light) LEDa) country (reflective vest, warning triangles,
● Remove the fuse.
a) In case of a LED failure, go to an authorised workshop to have etc.).
● Replace the blown fuse by one with an it replaced. ● All occupants should leave the vehicle and
identical amperage rating (same colour and wait in a safe place (for instance behind the
markings) and identical size. Full-LED main headlights Type roadside crash barrier).
● Replace the cover again or close the fuse
No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with LEDs.
box lid. In case of a LED failure, go to an authorised workshop to WARNING
have it replaced. ● Always observe the above steps and pro-
tect yourself and other road users.
Bulbs
 ››› page 91 ● If you change the wheel on a slope, block
the wheel on the opposite side of the car with
a stone or similar to prevent the vehicle from
Bulbs (12 V)
moving.

Light source used for each function Action in the event of a punc-
Halogen headlights Type ture
Dipped beam headlights H7 Long Life
What to do first
Main beam headlights H7
● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface
Side light / DRL (daytime running and in a safe place as far away from traffic as
W21W
light)
possible.
Turn signal PY 21W ● Apply the handbrake.
● Switch on the hazard warning lights.
● Manual gearbox: select the 1st gear.
49
The essentials

Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc- ● Remove the lid from the filling tube ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the
ture kit ››› Fig. 61 and screw the open end of the
3 valve.
tube into the tyre valve. ● Repeat the inflation process.
● With the tyre sealant bottle upside down, ● If the indicated pressure still cannot be
fill the tyre with the contents of the sealant reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop
bottle. and request assistance from an authorised
● Remove the bottle from the valve. technician.
● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us- ● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew
ing the tool ››› Fig. 61 1 . the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.
● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and
Inflating the tyre 2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding
● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube 80 km/h (50 mph).
››› Fig. 61 8 into the tyre valve. ● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes
● Check that the air bleed screw is closed ›››  page 84.
Fig. 61 Standard representation: contents of
››› Fig. 61 6 .
›››
the anti-puncture kit. ● Start the engine and leave it running.
● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 61 9 into the
 in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* on
page 83

The anti-puncture kit is located under the


floor panel in the luggage compartment.
vehicle's 12-volt socket ›››  page 140.
● Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFF
 ››› page 83

switch ››› Fig. 61 5 .


Sealing the tyre
● Keep the air compressor running until it
● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use
reaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar
the ››› Fig. 61 1 tool to remove the insert.
(29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8
Place it on a clean surface.
minutes.
● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously
● Disconnect the air compressor.
››› Fig. 61 10 .
● If it does not reach the pressure indicated,
● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 61 3 into
unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.
the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break
automatically. ● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is
distributed throughout the tyre.

50
The essentials

Changing a wheel Central wheel trim* Note


There is also a marking on the rear side of the
Vehicle tool kit central wheel trim showing the correct align-
ment with the inflation valve.

Wheel covers*

Fig. 63 Correct position of the central wheel


trim for steel wheels.
Fig. 62 Underneath the floor panel of the lug-
The central trims must be removed for access
gage compartment: vehicle tool kit.
to the wheel bolts.
1 An adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
Removing
2 Towline anchorage Fig. 64 Remove the wheel cover.
● Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools) to one
3 Box spanner for wheel bolts*
of the chambers of the central wheel trim.
The wheel covers must be removed for access
4 Crank handle for jack ● Insert the box spanner through the hook, to the wheel bolts.
5 Jack* supporting it on the tyre and remove the
6 Hook for extracting the central wheel wheel trim. Removing
trims* ● Remove the wheel cover using the wire
Fitting
7 Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps. hook ››› Fig. 64.
● Fit the central wheel trim onto the wheel.
● Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the
The lower part of the SEAT emblem letter “S”
 ››› in Vehicle tools on page 82
should be in line with the inflation valve
››› Fig. 63 1 .
wheel cover.

Fitting
 ››› page 82 ● Firmly press upon the central trim until it
locks in with an audible click.
● Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by
pressing it firmly. »
51
The essentials

● Put pressure on the point of the cut-out for Wheel bolts Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn
the valve. before raising the vehicle with the jack.
● Next fit the rest of the wheel cover. If the wheel bolt is very tight, push down the
end of the spanner carefully with your foot.
During this operation, hold on to the vehicle
Wheel bolt caps* for support and take care not to slip.

Loosening wheel bolts


● Fit the box spanner over the wheel bolt as
far as it will go ››› Fig. 66.
● Hold the spanner at the end and rotate the
Fig. 66 Changing a wheel: loosen the wheel bolt approx. one turn anticlockwise ››› in
bolts. Removing and fitting the wheel on
page 54.

The caps protect the wheel bolts and should


be remounted as far as they will go after
Fig. 65 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps. changing the wheel.

Removal Loosen the anti-theft bolt.


● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools) over the ● Take the adapter for anti-theft wheel bolt
cap until it clicks into place ››› Fig. 65. out of the vehicle tool kit.
● Remove the cap with the plastic clip. ● Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt as
far as it will go ››› Fig. 67.
Fig. 67 Changing a wheel: tyre valve 1 and ● Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over
assembly position of the anti-theft wheel the adapter.
locking bolt 2 or 3 .
● Hold the spanner at the end and rotate the
Use only the box spanner supplied with the bolt approx. one turn anticlockwise ››› in
vehicle to loosen and tighten the wheel Removing and fitting the wheel on
bolts. page 54.

52
The essentials

The anti-theft wheel bolt has a different cap. Raising the vehicle ● Find the support point on the strut (sunken
This cap only fits on anti-theft wheel bolts area) closest to the wheel to be changed
and is not for use with standard wheel bolts. ››› Fig. 68.
● Turn the jack* crank handle, located below
Important information about wheel bolts the strut support point, to raise it until the
The factory-assembled wheel rims and wheel tab 1 ››› Fig. 69 is below the housing provi-
bolts are matched in terms of construction. ded.
Therefore, if different rims are fitted, the cor- ● Align the jack* so that tab 1 “grips” onto
rect wheel bolts with the right length and cor- the housing provided on the strut and the
rectly-shaped bolt heads must be used. This mobile base 2 is resting on the ground. The
ensures that wheels are fitted securely and base plate 2 should fall vertically with re-
that the brake system functions correctly. spect to the support point 1 .
Fig. 68 Jack position points.
In certain circumstances, you should not ● Continue turning the jack* until the wheel
even use wheel bolts from vehicles of the is slightly lifted off the ground.
same model.
WARNING
On wheels with entire hub-cap, the anti-theft
wheel bolt must be screwed into positions ● Make sure that the jack* remains stable. If
2 or 3 , taking the tyre valve position 1 as the surface is slippery or soft, the jack* could
your reference. Otherwise it will not be possi- slip or sink, respectively, with the resultant
ble to mount the entire hub-cap. risk of injury.
● Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup-
plied by the manufacturer. Other vehicles
could slip, with the consequent risk of injury.
● Only mount the jack* on the support points
Fig. 69 Fitting the jack.
designed for this purpose on the strut, and
always align the jack correctly. If you do not,
● Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm
the jack* could slip as it does not have an ad-
ground. If necessary use a large, strong equate grip on the vehicle: risk of injury!
board or similar support. If the surface is slip-
● The height of the parked vehicle can
pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a
change as a result of variations in tempera-
rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip- »
ture and loading.
ping ››› .

53
The essentials

CAUTION ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit- ● Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn
ting the wheel. before raising the vehicle with the jack.
The vehicle must not be raised on the cross-
bar. Only place the jack* on the points de- ● Never apply grease or oil to the wheel bolts
Wheel bolt tightening torque or to the hub threads. Although the bolts
signed for this purpose on the strut. Other-
wise, the vehicle may be damaged. The prescribed tightening torque for wheel have been tightened to the prescribed tor-
bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 140 Nm. que, they could come loose while driving.
After changing a wheel, have the tightening ● Never loosen the threaded joints of wheel
torque checked immediately with a torque rims with bolted ring trims.
Removing and fitting the wheel
wrench that works perfectly. ● If the wheel bolts are tightened to a torque
Change the wheel after loosening the wheel Before checking the tightening torque, rusty below the recommended value, the bolts and
bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack. hubs could come loose during driving On the
wheel bolts that are difficult to tighten
contrary, if the tightening torque is too high,
should be replaced and the hub threads the wheel bolts or thread can be damaged.
Taking off the wheel should be cleaned.
● Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box Never apply grease or oil to the wheel bolts CAUTION
spanner and place them on a clean surface. or to the hub threads. Although the bolts
● Take off the wheel ››› . have been tightened to the prescribed tor- When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim
may hit and damage the brake disc. For this
que, they could come loose while driving.
reason, please take care and get a second
Putting on the spare wheel person to assist you.
WARNING
When fitting tyres with a compulsory rotation
direction, observe the instructions in If the wheel bolts are not tightened properly,
››› page 54. they could come loose while driving and
Tyres with compulsory rotation direc-
cause an accident, serious injury and loss of
● Mount the wheel. control of the vehicle. tion
● Screw on the wheel bolts in position and ● Use only wheel bolts which belong to the
A directional tread pattern can be identified
tighten them loosely with a box spanner. wheel in question.
by the arrows on the sidewall that point in
● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*. ● Never use different wheel bolts.
the direction of rotation. Always observe the
● Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairs ● Wheel bolts and threats should be clean, direction of rotation indicated when fitting
free of oil or grease and they should turn the wheel to guarantee optimum properties
using the wheel brace.
easily. of this type of tyres with regard to grip,
The wheel bolts should be clean and turn ● Use only the vehicle’s factory-supplied box noises, wear and aquaplaning.
easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect spanner to loosen and tighten the wheel
bolts. If it is absolutely necessary to fit the spare
the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-
tyre* against the direction of rotation, drive
54
The essentials

with care as this means the tyre does not of- Snow chains Remove wheel covers and any integral trim
fer optimum driving properties. This is of par- ring before fitting snow chains.
ticular importance when the road surface is
Use Remove the chains when roads are free of
wet.
snow. Driving characteristics worsen, and the
To return to directional tread tires, replace Snow chains should only be used on the wheels become damaged quickly and may
the punctured tyre as soon as possible and front wheels. even be rendered unusable.
restore the obligatory direction of rotation of
● Check that they are correctly seated after
all tyres. WARNING
driving for a few yards; correct the position if
necessary, in accordance with the manufac- Snow chains should be correctly tightened in
turer's fitting instructions. accordance with the manufacturer's instruc-
Subsequent work tions. This will prevent the chains coming in-
● Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph). to contact with the wheel housing.
● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps. ● If there is a danger of being trapped de-
● Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap. spite having mounted the chains, it is best to
disable the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC
● Return all tools to their proper storing loca-
›››  page 164.
tion.
● If the replaced wheel does not fit in the Snow chains will improve braking ability as
spare wheel housing, store it safely in the well as traction in winter conditions.
luggage compartment ›››  page 141. For technical reasons snow chains may only
● Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun- be used with the following wheel rim/tyre
ted tyre as soon as possible. combination.
● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indi-
cator, adjust the pressure and store it in 185/70 R14 Chains with links of maximum 13.5
mm
memory ›››  page 247.
● Have the tightening torque of the wheel 185/65 R15 Chains with links of maximum 13.5
bolts checked as soon as possible with a tor- mm
que wrench (it should be 120 Nm). Mean- 195/55 R16 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm
while, drive carefully.
215/45 R17 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm
● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as
possible. 215/40 R18 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm

55
The essentials

Emergency towing of the vehi- Towline anchorages Driving style

cle Attach the bar or rope to the towline ancho- Towing requires some experience, especially
rages. when using a tow rope. Both drivers should
realise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. In-
Towing The towline anchorages are located under
experienced drivers should not attempt to
the floor panel in the luggage compartment,
tow.
next to the vehicle tools ››› page 51.
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle
Screw the towline anchorage into the screw
and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope.
connection ››› Fig. 70 o ››› Fig. 71 and tighten
When towing on an unpaved road, there is al-
it with the wheel brace.
ways a risk of overloading and damaging the
anchorage points.
Tow rope or tow bar
The ignition of the vehicle being towed must
It is easier and safer for the vehicle to be tow-
be switched on to prevent the steering wheel
ed using a tow bar. You should only use a
from locking and also to allow the use of the
tow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar.
turn signals, horn, windscreen wipers and
Fig. 70 Right side of the front bumper: Tow- A tow rope should be slightly elastic to re- washers.
ing ring. duce the loading on both vehicles. It is advis-
Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicles
able to use a tow rope made of synthetic fi-
with a manual gearbox. With an automatic
bre or similarly elastic material.
gearbox, place the lever in N.
Attach the tow rope or the tow bar only to the
The brake servo only works when the engine
towline anchorages provided or a towing
is running. When not running, you must ap-
bracket.
ply considerably more pressure to the brake
pedal.
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
● The tow rope must be taut before you drive As the power assisted steering does not work
off. if the engine is not running, you will need
more strength to steer than you normally
● Release the clutch very carefully when start-
would.
Fig. 71 Right side of the rear bumper: Towing ing the vehicle (manual gearbox), or acceler-
ring. ate gently (automatic gearbox).

56
The essentials

How to jump start: description


 ››› in General information on page 85
 ››› in General information on page 85

 ››› page 85
 ››› page 85

Tow-starting How to jump start


If the engine will not start, first try starting it
using the battery of another vehicle Jump leads
››› page 57. You should only attempt to tow-
start a vehicle if charging the battery does The jump lead must have a sufficient wire
cross section. Fig. 72 Diagram of connections for vehicles
not work. This is done by leveraging wheel without Start-Stop system.
movement. If the engine fails to start because of a dis-
When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol en- charged battery, the battery can be connec-
gine, do not tow it more than a short dis- ted to the battery of another vehicle to start
tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter the the engine.
catalytic converter.
Jump leads
However, if your vehicle has to be tow-star- Jump leads must comply with standard DIN
ted: 72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-
● Engage 2nd or 3rd gear. tions). The wire cross section must be at least
25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least
● Keep the clutch pressed down.
35 mm2 for diesel engines.
● Switch the ignition on. Fig. 73 Diagram of connections for vehicles
● Once both vehicles are moving, release the Note with Start-Stop system.
clutch. ● The vehicles must not touch each other,
otherwise electricity could flow as soon as Jump lead terminal connections
● As soon as the engine starts, press the
clutch and move the gear lever into neutral. the positive terminals are connected. 1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles
This helps to prevent driving into the towing ● The discharged battery must be properly ››› . »
vehicle. connected to the on-board network.

57
The essentials

2. Connect one end of the red jump lead to 8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat imprint on battery). Failure to comply could
the positive + terminal of the vehicle battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes until result in an explosion.
with the flat battery A ››› Fig. 72. the engine is running. ● Never use jump leads when one of the bat-
3. Connect the other end of the red jump teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even af-
Removing the jump leads ter the battery has thawed, battery acid could
lead to the positive terminal + in the ve-
hicle providing assistance B . 9. Before you remove the jump leads, switch leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery
off the dipped beam headlights if they are freezes, it should be replaced.
4. For vehicles without Start-Stop system: ● Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes
switched on.
connect one end of the black jump lead to away from batteries, danger of explosion.
the negative terminal – of the vehicle 10.Turn on the heater blower and heated rear Failure to comply could result in an explo-
providing the current B ››› Fig. 72. window in the vehicle with the flat battery. sion.
This helps minimise voltage peaks which ● Observe the instructions provided by the
– For vehicles with Start-Stop system: con-
are generated when the leads are discon- manufacturer of the jump leads.
nect one end of the black jump lead X to a
nected.
suitable ground terminal, to a solid piece of ● Do not connect the negative cable from the
metal in the engine block, or to the engine 11.When the engine is running, disconnect other vehicle directly to the negative terminal
block itself ››› Fig. 73. the leads in reverse order to the details of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the
given above. battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of
5. Connect the other end of the black jump explosion.
lead X to a solid metal component bolted Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient ● Do not attach the negative cable from the
to the engine block or to the engine block metal-to-metal contact with the battery termi- other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to
itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. nals. the brake line.
Do not connect it to a point near the bat-
tery A . If the engine fails to start, switch off the start- ● The non-insulated parts of the battery
er after about 10 seconds and try again after clamps must not be allowed to touch. The
6. Position the leads in such a way that they about a minute. jump lead attached to the positive battery
cannot come into contact with any moving terminal must not touch metal parts of the ve-
parts in the engine compartment. WARNING hicle, this can cause a short circuit.
● Position the leads in such a way that they
● Please note the safety warnings referring to
Starting working in the engine compartment
cannot come into contact with any moving
parts in the engine compartment.
7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the ›››  page 232, Working in the engine
boosting battery and let it run at idling compartment. ● Do not lean on the batteries. This could re-
speed. ● The battery providing assistance must have
sult in chemical burns.
the same voltage as the flat battery (12 V)
and approximately the same capacity (see

58
The essentials

Note ● Extract the wiper blade from the wiper arm.

The vehicles must not touch each other, oth-


Fitting the wiper blade
erwise electricity could flow as soon as the
positive terminals are connected. ● Insert the wiper blade onto the windscreen
wiper arm until it clicks into place.
● Place the windscreen wiper arms to their in-
itial position.
Changing the windscreen wiper
blades ›››
Fig. 75 Changing the windscreen wiper
 in Changing the windscreen and
rear window wiper blades on page 85
Changing the wiper blades blade.
 ››› page 85
To change the blades it is necessary to move
the wipers from the rest position into the
service position. Changing the rear window wiper blade
Do not change the windscreen wipers when
out of the service position, as it could cause
paint to flake off the bonnet due to friction
with the windscreen wiper arm.

Service position (for changing wiper blades)


Fig. 74 Wipers in service position. ● Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.
● Turn the ignition on and off and then (with-
in approximately 9 seconds) push the wind-
screen wiper lever down (short wipe). The
windscreen wipers will move to the service Fig. 76 Removing and fitting the rear window
position ››› Fig. 74. wiper blade.

Removing the wiper blade Removing the wiper blade


● Lift the windscreen wiper arm. ● Lift the wiper arm away from the glass »
● Press the securing tab down 1 ››› Fig. 75.
59
The essentials

● Slide the blade adapter in the direction of


the arrow and remove the blade ››› Fig. 76 A.

Fitting the wiper blade


● With one hand, hold the top end of the wip-
er arm.
● Place the blade as shown in ››› Fig. 76 B
and slide the adapter along until it engages.

›››
 in Changing the windscreen and
rear window wiper blades on page 85

 ››› page 85

60
Safe driving

Safety – Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn What affects driving safety?

Technical data
signals are working properly.
As a driver, you are responsible for yourself
– Check tyre pressure.
Safe driving and your passengers. When your concentra-
– Ensure that all windows provide a clear and tion or driving safety is affected by any cir-
good view of the surroundings. cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as
Safety first!
– Ensure that all luggage is correctly secured
others on the road ››› , for this reason:
This chapter contains important information, ››› page 141. – Always pay attention to traffic and do not
tips, suggestions and warnings that you get distracted by passengers or telephone

Advice
– Make sure that no objects can interfere
should read and consider for both your own calls.
safety and for your passengers' safety. with the pedals.
– Never drive when your driving ability is im-
– Adjust front seat, head restraint and mir-
WARNING paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).
rors properly according to your size.
● This manual contains important informa- – Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
– Ensure that the passenger in the central

Operation
tion about the operation of the vehicle, both rear seat always has the head restraint in – Always reduce your speed as appropriate
for the driver and the passengers. The other the correct position for use. for road, traffic and weather conditions.
sections of the on-board documentation also
contain further information that you should – Instruct passengers to adjust the head re- – When travelling long distances, take
be aware of for your own safety and for the straints according to their height. breaks regularly - at least every two hours.
safety of your passengers.
– Protect children with appropriate child – If possible, avoid driving when you are tired

Emergencies
● Ensure that the on-board documentation is
seats and properly applied seat belts or stressed.
kept in the vehicle at all times. This is espe-
cially important when lending or selling the
››› page 78.
WARNING
vehicle to another person. – Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct
your passengers also to assume a proper When driving safety is impaired during a trip,
sitting position ››› page 62. the risk of injury and accidents increases.

Advice about driving – Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your
passengers also to fasten their seat belts

Safety
properly ››› page 67. Safety equipment
Before setting off
Never put your safety or the safety of your
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers in danger. In the event of an acci-
passengers, always note the following points dent, the safety equipment may reduce the »
before every trip:
61
Safety

risk of injury. The following list includes most Correct position for passengers mend the following adjustments for the driv-
of the safety equipment in your SEAT: er:
● three-point seat belts, Correct sitting position for driver – Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a
distance of at least 25 cm between the
● Belt tension limiter for the front and rear
steering wheel and the centre of your chest
side seats
››› Fig. 77.
● Belt tensioners for the front seats,
– Move the driver's seat forwards or back-
● front airbags,
wards so that you are able to press the ac-
● Side airbags in the front seat backrests, celerator, brake and clutch pedals to the
with chest and head protection floor with your knees still slightly angled
● “ISOFIX” anchor points for “ISOFIX” rear ››› .
child seat system – Ensure that you can reach the highest point
● height-adjustable front head restraints, of the steering wheel.
● Rear-centre head restraints with in-use po- Fig. 77 The proper distance between driver – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
sition and non-use position and steering wheel. edge is at the same level as the top of your
● adjustable steering column. head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head ››› Fig. 78.
The safety equipment mentioned above
– Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-
works together to provide you and your pas-
tion so that your back rests completely
sengers with the best possible protection in
against it.
the event of an accident. However, these
safety systems can only be effective if you – Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 67.
and your passengers are sitting in a correct
– Keep both feet in the footwell so that you
position and use this equipment properly.
have the vehicle under control at all times.
Safety is everyone's business!
Adjustment of the driver's seat ››› page 135.
Fig. 78 Correct head restraint position for the
driver. WARNING
● An incorrect sitting position of the driver
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
can lead to severe injuries.
injury in the event of an accident, we recom-

62
Safe driving

● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at Adjusting the steering wheel position – Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-

Technical data
least 25 cm distance between the centre of tion so that your back rests completely
the chest and the centre of the steering Read the additional information carefully against it.
wheel ››› Fig. 77. If distance is less than 25 ›››  page 13 – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
cm, the airbag system may not protect you
edge is at the same level as the top of your
properly. WARNING
head, or as close as possible to the same
● If your physical constitution prevents you ● Never adjust the position of the steering level as the top of your head ››› page 65.
from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 wheel when the vehicle is moving, as this
cm, contact a specialised workshop. The could cause an accident. – Always keep both feet in the footwell in

Advice
workshop will help you decide if special spe-
● Move the lever up firmly so the steering
front of the front passenger seat.
cific modifications are necessary.
wheel position does not accidentally change – Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 67.
● When driving, always hold the steering during driving. risk of accident!
wheel with both hands on the outside of the It is possible to deactivate the front passen-
● Make sure you are capable of reaching and
ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. ger airbag in exceptional circumstances
firmly holding the upper part of the steering
This reduces the risk of injury when the driver ››› page 76.

Operation
wheel: risk of accident!
airbag is triggered.
● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12
● If you adjust the steering wheel so that it Adjusting the front passenger seat
o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g.
points towards your face, the driver airbag ›››  page 11.
will not protect you properly in the event of
in the centre of the steering wheel). In such
an accident. Make sure that the steering WARNING
cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sus-
wheel points towards your chest.
tain injuries to the arms, hands and head. ● An incorrect sitting position of the front

Emergencies
● To reduce the risk of injury to the driver passenger can lead to severe injuries.
during sudden braking manoeuvres or an ac- ● Adjust the front passenger seat so that
cident, never drive with the backrest tilted far Correct sitting position for front pas- there is at least 25 cm between your chest
back! The airbag system and seat belts can senger and the dash panel. If distance is less than
only provide optimal protection when the 25 cm, the airbag system may not protect you
backrest is in an upright position and the For your own safety and to reduce the risk of properly.
driver is wearing his or her seat belt correct- injury in the event of an accident, we recom- ● If your physical constitution prevents you
ly. mend the following adjustments for the front

Safety
from maintaining the minimum distance of 25
● Adjust the head restraint properly to ach- passenger: cm, contact a specialised workshop. The
ieve optimal protection. workshop will help you decide if special spe-
– Move the front passenger seat back as far
as possible ››› . cific modifications are necessary. »

63
Safety

● Always keep your feet in the footwell when – Always keep both feet in the footwell in – Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect
the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the front of the rear seat. sitting position in the vehicle while travel-
dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An ling ››› .
– Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 67.
incorrect sitting position exposes you to an
increased risk of injury in case of a sudden – Use an appropriate child restraint system The following list contains examples of sit-
braking or an accident. If the airbag is trig- when you take children in the vehicle ting positions that could be dangerous for all
gered, you could sustain severe injuries due ››› page 78. vehicle occupants. The list is not complete,
to an incorrect sitting position. but we would like to make you aware of this
● To reduce the risk of injury to the front pas- WARNING issue.
senger in events such as sudden braking ma- ● If the passengers in the rear seats are not
noeuvres or an accident, never travel with the Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:
sitting properly, they could sustain severe in-
backrest tilted far back! The airbag system juries. ● Never stand in the vehicle.
and seat belts can only provide optimal pro-
tection when the backrest is in an upright po- ● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order ● Never stand on the seats.
sition and the front passenger is wearing his to achieve maximum protection. ● Never kneel on the seats.
or her seat belt properly. The further the seat ● Seat belts can only provide optimal protec-
● Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.
backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater tion when seat backrests are in an upright
the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning position and the vehicle occupants are wear- ● Never lean against the dash panel.
of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting po- ing their seat belts correctly. If passengers In ● Never lie on the rear bench.
sition! the rear seats are not sitting in an upright po-
sition, the risk of injury due to incorrect posi- ● Never sit on the front edge of a seat.
● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order
to achieve maximum protection. tioning of the seat belt increases. ● Never sit sideways.
● Never lean out of a window.
● Never put your feet out of a window.
Correct sitting position for rear seat Examples of incorrect sitting posi-
● Never put your feet on the dash panel.
passengers tions
● Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a Seat belts can provide optimal protection on- ● Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot-
sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident, ly when the belt webs are properly posi- well.
passengers on the rear seat bench must con- tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substan- ● Never travel without wearing the seat belt.
sider the following: tially reduce the protective function of seat
belts and increase the risk of injury due to in- ● Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug-
– Sit up straight. correct seat belt position. As the driver, you gage compartment.
– Adjust the head restraint to the correct po- are responsible for all passengers, especially
sition ››› page 65. children.
64
Safe driving

WARNING Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- Correct adjustment of rear head re-

Technical data
portant part of passenger protection and can straints
● Any incorrect sitting position increases the
reduce the risk of injuries in most accident
risk of severe injuries.
situations.
● Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the
vehicle occupants to severe injuries if airbags – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
are triggered, by striking a vehicle occupant edge is, as far as possible, at the same lev-
who has assumed an incorrect sitting posi- el as the top of your head, or at the very
tion. least, at eye level ››› Fig. 79.

Advice
● Before the vehicle moves, assume the prop-
er sitting position and maintain it throughout WARNING
the trip. Before every trip, instruct your pas- ● Travelling with the head restraints removed
sengers to sit properly and to stay in this po- or improperly adjusted increases the risk of
sition during the trip ››› page 62, Correct posi- severe injuries. An improper adjustment of
tion for passengers. the head restraints may cause death in an ac- Fig. 80 Head restraints in the correct posi-

Operation
cident and increase the risk of suffering inju- tion.
ries during abrupt braking actions or unex-
Correct adjustment of front head re- pected manoeuvres.
straints ● The head restraints must always be adjus-
ted according to the height of the passenger.

Emergencies
Fig. 81 Head restraint position warning label.

Safety
Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-
Fig. 79 Correctly adjusted head restraint as
portant part of the passenger protection and
viewed from the front and the side. can reduce the risk of injuries in most acci-
dent situations »

65
Safety

Rear head restraints Pedal area would reduce the pedal area and could ob-
– The rear head restraints have 2 positions: struct the pedals. Risk of accident.
use and non-use. Pedals ● Never place objects in the driver footwell.
An object could move into the pedal area and
– One position for use (head restraint raised)
– Ensure that you can always press the accel- impair pedal operation. In the event of a sud-
››› Fig. 80. In this position, the head re- den driving or braking manoeuvre, you will
erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired
straints are used normally, protecting pas- not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ac-
to the floor.
sengers along with the rear seat belts. celerator pedal. Risk of accident!
– Ensure that the pedals can return unim-
– And one position for non-use (head re-
paired to their initial positions.
straint lowered).
– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-
– To fit the head restraint in position for use,
tened during the trip and do not obstruct
press button A and pull on the edges with
the pedals ››› .
both hands in the direction of the arrow.
Only use floor mats which leave the pedals
WARNING clear and which are secured to prevent them
● Under no circumstances should the rear from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor
passengers travel while the head restraints mats from a specialised dealership.
are in the non-use position. See the warning
label located on the rear side fixed window
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must
››› Fig. 81. be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop
the vehicle.
● Do not swap the centre rear head restraint
with either of the outer seat rear head re-
straints. Risk of injury in case of an accident! Wear suitable footwear
Always wear shoes which support your feet
CAUTION properly and give you a good feeling for the
pedals.
Note the instructions on the adjustment of
the head restraints ››› page 135. WARNING
● If the pedals are obstructed, an accident
may occur. Risk of serious injuries.
● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor cov-
erings over the original floor mats. This

66
Seat belts

Seat belts Seat belt lamp*  of more than approximately 25 km/h

Technical data
(15 mph) or if the seat belts are unfastened
while the vehicle is in motion. The warning
Why wear a seat belt? light will also flash .
The  lamp goes out when the driver and
Number of seats
passenger seat belts are fastened with the ig-
Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front nition switched on.
and three in the rear. Each seat is equipped

Advice
with a three-point seat belt. Rear seat belts fastened display*
Depending on the model version, when the
WARNING ignition is switched on, the seat belt status
● Never transport more than the permitted display ››› Fig. 82 on the instrument panel in-
Fig. 82 Instrument panel: right rear seat oc-
amount of people in your vehicle. cupied and corresponding seat belt fastened forms the driver whether the passengers in
display. the rear seats have fastened their seat belts.

Operation
● Every vehicle occupant must properly fas-
ten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or
The  symbol indicates that the passenger in
her seat. Children must be protected with an The control lamp illuminates to remind the this seat has fastened “his or her” seat belt.
appropriate child restraint system. driver to fasten his seat belt. When a seat belt in the rear seats is fastened
Before starting the vehicle: or unfastened, the seat belt status is dis-
played for approximately 30 seconds. The in-
– Fasten your seat belt securely.

Emergencies
dication can be hidden by pressing the
– Instruct your passengers to fasten their 0.0/SET button on the dash panel.
seat belts properly before driving off. The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of
– Protect children by using a child seat ac- 30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats
cording to the child's height and weight. is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion.
An audible warning will also be heard if the
When the ignition is switched on, the control vehicle is travelling at over 25 km/h
lamp  in the instrument panel lights up (de- (15 mph).

Safety
pending on the model version) if the driver or
passenger have not fastened their seat belts.
An audible warning signal will sound for a
few seconds if the seat belts are not fastened
as the vehicle drives off and reaches a speed
67
Safety

The protective function of seat belts Ensure that your passengers wear their seat WARNING
belts as well. Accident statistics have shown
● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at
that wearing seat belts is an effective means
all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The
of substantially reducing the risk of injury
optimal protection from seat belts can be
and improving the chances of survival when
achieved only if you use them properly.
involved in a serious accident. Furthermore,
● Fasten your seat belt before every trip -
properly worn seat belts improve the protec-
even when driving in town. Other vehicle oc-
tion provided by airbags in the event of an
cupants must also wear the seat belts at all
accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt
times, otherwise they run the risk of being in-
is required by law in most countries. jured.
Although your vehicle is equipped with air- ● The seat belt cannot offer its full protection
bags, the seat belts must be fastened and if the seat belt is not positioned correctly.
Fig. 83 Drivers with properly worn seat belts worn. The front airbags, for example, are only ● Never allow two passengers (even children)
will not be thrown forward in the event of sud- triggered in some cases of head-on collision. to share the same seat belt.
den braking. The front airbags will not be triggered during ● Always keep both feet in the footwell in
minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli- front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in
Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air- motion.
in the proper position. These also help pre- bag trigger threshold value in the control unit
vent uncontrolled movements that may result ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-
is not exceeded.
in serious injury and reduce the risk of being cle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
thrown out of the vehicle. Therefore, you should always wear your seat ● The seat belt must never be twisted while it
belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants is being worn.
Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts have fastened their seat belts properly before ● The seat belt should never lie on hard or
correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the you drive off! fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.)
belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,
because this can cause injuries.
the front part of your vehicle and other pas-
sive safety features (such as the airbag sys- ● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or
tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-
Safety instructions on using seat jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
gy released in a collision. Taken together, all belts ● Never wear the seat belt under the arm or
these features reduce the releasing kinetic in any other incorrect position.
– Always wear the seat belt as described in
energy and consequently, the risk of injury. ● Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat
This is why it is so important to fasten seat this section. over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and func-
belts before every trip, even when "just driv- – Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened tion of the seat belts, reducing their capacity
ing around the corner". at all times and are not damaged. to protect.

68
Seat belts

● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be Head-on collisions and the laws of called “kinetic energy” is created both in the

Technical data
blocked with paper or other objects, as this physics passengers and inside the vehicle.
can prevent the latch plate from engaging se- The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on
curely.
the speed of the vehicle and the weight of
● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or the vehicle and its passengers. The higher
similar items to alter the position of the belt the speed and the greater the weight, the
webbing. more energy there is to be “absorbed” in an
● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the accident.
connections, belt retractors or parts of the

Advice
buckle could cause severe injuries in the The most significant factor, however, is the
event of an accident. Therefore, you must speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles
check the condition of all seat belts at regular from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h
intervals. (30 mph), for example, the corresponding ki-
● Seat belts which have been worn in an acci- netic energy is multiplied by four.
Fig. 84 A driver not wearing a seat belt is
dent and stretched must be replaced by a

Operation
thrown forward violently. Because the vehicle occupants in our exam-
specialised workshop. Renewal may be nec- ple are not restrained by seat belts, in the
essary even if there is no apparent damage.
event of crashing against a wall, all of the oc-
The belt anchorage should also be checked.
cupants' kinetic energy will be absorbed
● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat solely by said impact.
belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-
moved or modified in any way. Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to

Emergencies
● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-
retractors may not work properly. ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne
(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are
even higher.
Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are
Fig. 85 The unbelted passenger in the rear
not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on
seat is thrown forward violently, hitting the collision, they will move forward at the same

Safety
driver who is wearing a seat belt. speed their vehicle was travelling just before
the impact. This example applies not only to
It is easy to explain how the laws of physics head-on collisions, but to all accidents and
work in the case of a head-on collision: when collisions. »
a vehicle starts moving, a type of energy

69
Safety

Even at low speeds the forces acting on the How to properly adjust your
body in a collision are so great that it is not
possible to brace oneself with one's hands. seatbelt
In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers
are thrown forward and will make violent con- Fastening and unfastening the seat
tact with the steering wheel, dash panel, belt
windscreen or whatever else is in the way
››› Fig. 84.
It is also important for rear passengers to
wear seat belts properly, as they could other-
wise be thrown forward violently through the
vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in
Fig. 87 Position of seat belt during pregnan-
the rear seats who do not use seat belts en- cy.
danger not only themselves but also the front
occupants ››› Fig. 85. Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 12.

Fasten your seat belt


The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if
the seat belt is not positioned correctly.
● Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
● To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch
plate and pull it slowly across your chest and
lap.
Fig. 86 Positioning and removing the seat ● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the
belt buckle. appropriate seat and push it down until it is
securely locked with an audible click
››› Fig. 86.
● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is
securely engaged in the buckle.

70
Seat belts

The seat belts are equipped with an automat- ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi- The seat belts for the front and rear side oc-

Technical data
ic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full free- cle is in motion. If you do, you increase the cupants are equipped with belt tensioners.
dom of movement is permitted when the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries. Sensors will trigger the belt tensioners only
shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur- ● An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause se- during severe head-on and lateral collisions.
ing sudden braking, during travel in steep vere injuries in the event of an accident. This retracts and tightens the seat belts, re-
areas or bends and during acceleration, the ducing the forward motion of the occupants.
● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie
automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is
on the centre of the shoulder, never across The belt tensioners will not be triggered in
locked. the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and fit the event of minor collisions, if the vehicle
comfortably on the torso

Advice
The automatic belt retractors on the front overturns, or in accidents where no major
seats are fitted with seat belt tensioners ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie across forces act on the vehicle.
››› page 71. the pelvis, never across the stomach. The
seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably on Note
Releasing the seat belt the pelvis Pull the belt tight if necessary to
● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a
take up any slack.
● Press the red button on the belt buckle fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is

Operation
● For pregnant women, the lap part of the not an indication of fire in the vehicle.
››› Fig. 86. The latch plate is released and seat belt must lie as low as possible over the
springs out ››› . pelvis, never across the stomach, and always
● The relevant safety requirements must be
● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls observed when the vehicle or components of
lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the
the system are scrapped. Specialised work-
up easily and the trim is not damaged. abdomen ››› Fig. 87.
shops are familiar with these regulations,
● Always engage the retractor lock when you which are also available to you.
Positioning seat belts

Emergencies
are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1
Seat belts offer their maximum protection on- ››› page 78.
ly when they are properly positioned. ● Read and observe the warnings ››› page 68.
Service and disposal of belt tension-
WARNING
ers
● The seat belts offer best protection only
Belt pretensioners* The belt tensioners are components of the
when the backrests are in an upright position seat belts that are installed in the seats of
and the seat belts have been fastened prop-

Safety
your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-
erly. How the seat belt tensioner works
ers or remove and install parts of the system
● Never put the latch plate in the buckle of when performing other repair work, the seat
Read the additional information carefully
another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will belt may be damaged. The consequence may
›››  page 12
not protect you properly and the risk of injury be that, in the event of an accident, the belt »
is increased.

71
Safety

tensioners function incorrectly or may not


function at all.
Airbag system airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may
inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occu-
pant. This also applies to children.
So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten- Brief introduction
sioner is not reduced and that removed parts Always maintain the greatest possible dis-
do not cause any injuries or environmental tance between yourself and the front airbag.
Why is it so important to wear a seat
pollution, regulations, which are known to This way, the front airbags can completely
the specialised workshops, must be ob- belt and to sit correctly? deploy when triggered, providing their maxi-
served. mum protection.
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best
protection, the seat belt must always be worn The most important factors that will trigger
WARNING
properly and the correct sitting position must an airbag are: the type of accident, the angle
● Improper use or repairs not carried out by be assumed. of collision and the speed of the vehicle.
qualified mechanics increase the risk of se-
vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may The airbag system is not a substitute for seat Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-
fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong cir- belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration
cumstances. overall passive safety system. Please bear in rate resulting from the collision and detected
● Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or mind that the airbag system can only work ef- by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration
install parts of the belt tensioners or seat fectively when the vehicle occupants are occurring during the collision and measured
belts. wearing their seat belts correctly and have by the control unit remains below the speci-
● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and auto- adjusted the head restraints properly. There- fied reference values, the front, side and/or
matic retractor cannot be repaired. fore, it is most important to properly wear the curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take in-
seat belts at all times, not only because this to account that the visible damage in a vehi-
● Any work on the belt tensioners and seat
is required by law in most countries, but also cle involved in an accident, no matter how
belts, including the removal and refitting of
system parts in conjunction with other repair for your safety ››› page 67, Why wear a seat serious, is not a determining factor for the
work, must be performed by a specialised belt?. airbags to have been triggered.
workshop only. The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so
WARNING
● The belt tensioners will only provide pro- if you are not properly seated when the air-
tection for one accident and must be changed bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju- ● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assum-
if they have been activated. ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle ing an incorrect sitting position can lead to
occupants assume a correct sitting position critical or fatal injuries.
while travelling. ● All vehicle occupants, including children,
who are not properly belted can sustain criti-
Sharp braking before an accident may cause cal or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered.
a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be Children up to 12 years old should always
thrown forward into the area of the deploying
72
Airbag system

travel on the rear seat. Never transport ● a control lamp  on the dash panel WARNING

Technical data
children in the vehicle if they are not restrain- ››› page 74.
● The seat belts and airbags can only provide
ed or the restraint system is not appropriate ● key-operated switch for front passenger air- maximum protection if the occupants are
for their age, size or weight. bag, seated correctly ››› page 62, Correct position
● If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if you ● a control lamp for disabling/enabling the for passengers.
lean forward or to the side while travelling or front passenger airbag. ● If a fault has occurred in the airbag system,
assume an incorrect sitting position, there is
have the system checked immediately by a
a substantially increased risk of injury. This The airbag system operation is monitored specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a
increased risk of injury will be further in- electronically. The airbag control lamp will il-

Advice
frontal collision the system might not trigger
creased if you are struck by an inflating air- luminate for a few seconds every time the ig- correctly or may fail to trigger at all.
bag.
nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).
● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating
airbag, always wear the seat belt properly. There is a fault in the system if the control
● Always adjust the front seats properly.
Airbag activation
lamp :

Operation
● does not light up when the ignition is The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within
switched on ››› page 74, thousandths of a second, to provide addi-
Description of airbag system ● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition tional protection in the event of an accident.
is switched on, A fine dust may develop when the airbag de-
Read the additional information carefully ploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-
›››  page 13. ● turns off and then lights up again after the tion of fire in the vehicle.

Emergencies
ignition is switched on,
The airbag system is not a substitute for the The airbag system is only ready to function
● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is
seat belts. The airbag system offers addition- when the ignition is on.
al protection for the driver and passenger in moving.
combination with the seat belts. In special accidents instances, several air-
The airbag system is not triggered if: bags may activate at the same time.
The airbag system mainly comprises (as per ● the ignition is switched off In the event of minor head-on and side colli-
vehicle equipment): ● there is a minor frontal collision sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-

Safety
● an electronic control and monitoring sys- over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.
● there is a minor side collision
tem (control unit)
● there is a rear-end collision Activation factors
● frontal airbags for driver and passenger,
● the vehicle turns over. The conditions that lead to the airbag system
● side airbags,
activating in each situation cannot be gener-
● curtain airbags, alised. Some factors play an important role, »
73
Safety

such as the properties of the object the vehi- ● the hazard warning lights switch on; In the event of a malfunction, the warning
cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle ● all doors are unlocked; lamp remains on continuously. Have the air-
speed, etc. bag system inspected immediately by a spe-
● the fuel supply to the engine is cut.
cialised workshop.
Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-
vation. If any of the airbags are disabled by a Techni-
Airbag control lamp and seat belt ten- cal Service, the warning lamp flashes for sev-
The control unit analyses the collision trajec-
eral more seconds after verification and will
tory and activates the respective restraint sioner 
turn off if there is no fault.
system.
The control lamp monitors all airbags and
If the deceleration rate is below the prede- WARNING
seat belt tensioners in the vehicle, including
fined reference value in the control unit the
control units and wiring connections. ● If there is a malfunction, the airbag and
airbags will not be triggered, even though belt tensioner system cannot properly per-
the accident may cause extensive damage to form its protective function.
Monitoring of airbag and belt tensioner sys-
the car.
tem ● If a malfunction occurs, have the system
checked immediately by a specialised work-
The following airbags are triggered in seri- Both the airbag and belt tensioner systems
shop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident,
ous head-on collisions operation is constantly monitored electroni- the airbag system and belt tensioners may
cally. The control lamp  will light up for a not be triggered, or may not be triggered cor-
● Driver airbag.
few seconds every time the ignition is switch- rectly.
● Front passenger front airbag ed on (self-diagnosis).

The following airbags are triggered in seri- The system must be checked when the con-
ous side-on collisions trol lamp  : Airbag safety instructions
● Front side airbag on the side of the acci- ● does not light up when the ignition is
dent. switched on, Front airbags
● Rear side airbag on the side of the acci- ● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition
Read the additional information carefully
dent. is switched on,
›››  page 13.
● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac- ● turns off and then lights up again after the
cident. ignition is switched on, WARNING
● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is ● The seat belts and airbags can only provide
In an accident with airbag activation: moving. maximum protection if the occupants are
● the interior lights switch on (if the interior
light switch is in the courtesy light position);
74
Airbag system

seated correctly ››› page 62, Correct position ● Occupants of the outer seats must never specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may

Technical data
for passengers. carry any objects or pets in the deployment occur during the airbag system operation.
● The deployment space between the front space between them and the airbags, or al- ● Do not attempt to modify components of
passengers and the airbags must not in any low children or other passengers to travel in the airbag system in any way.
case be occupied by other passenger, pets this position. It is also important not to at-
● The side and head airbags are managed
and objects. tach any accessories (such as cup holders) to
the doors. This would impair the protection through sensors located in the interior of the
● The airbags provide protection for just one front doors. To ensure the correct operation of
offered by the side airbags.
accident; replace them once they have de- the side and curtain (head) airbags neither
● The built-in coat hooks should be used only
ployed. the doors nor the door panels should be

Advice
for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeak-
● It is also important not to attach any ob-
heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. ers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag
jects such as cup holders or telephone
● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, system may not work correctly. All work car-
mountings to the surfaces covering the air-
bag units. must not be exerted upon the backrest bol- ried out on the front door must be done in a
ster because the system may be damaged. In specialised workshop.
● Do not attempt to modify components of
this case, the side airbags would not be trig- ● In a side-on collision the side airbags will

Operation
the airbag system in any way. gered. not work if the sensors do not correctly meas-
● Under no circumstances should protective ure the pressure increase on the interior of
covers be fitted over seats with side airbags the doors, due to air escaping through the
Side airbags* unless the covers have been approved for use areas with holes or openings in the door pan-
in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys el.
Read the additional information carefully from the side of the backrest, the use of con- ● Never drive if the interior door panels have

Emergencies
›››  page 14. ventional seat covers would obstruct the side been removed or if the panels have not been
airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effec- correctly fitted.
WARNING tiveness.
● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers
● Any damage to the original seat upholstery
● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean in the door panels have been removed, un-
forward, or are not seated correctly while the or around the seams of the side airbag units less the holes left by the loudspeakers have
vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk must be repaired immediately by a special- been closed properly.
of injury if the side airbag system is triggered ised workshop.
● Always check that the openings are closed
in an accident. ● The airbags provide protection for just one

Safety
or covered if additional loudspeakers or other
● In order for the side airbags to provide their accident; replace them once they have de- equipment are fitted inside the door panels.
maximum protection, the prescribed sitting ployed.
● Any work carried out to the doors should be
position must always be maintained with ● Any work on the side airbag system or re-
made in an authorised specialised workshop.
seat belts fastened while travelling. moval and installation of the airbag compo-
nents for other repairs (such as removal of
the front seat) should only be performed by a
75
Safety

Curtain airbags* ● Any work on the head-protection airbag Deactivating airbags


system or removal and installation of the air-
Read the additional information carefully bag components for other repairs (such as re- Deactivation of front passenger front
›››  page 15. moval of the roof lining) should only be per-
formed by a specialised workshop. Other- airbag*
WARNING wise, faults may occur during the airbag sys-
tem operation.
● In order for the head-protection airbags to
provide their maximum protection, the pre- ● Do not attempt to modify components of
scribed sitting position must always be main- the airbag system in any way.
tained with seat belts fastened while travel- ● The side and head airbags are managed
ling. through sensors located in the interior of the
● For safety reasons, the curtain airbag must front doors. To ensure the correct operation of
be disabled in those vehicles fitted with a the side and curtain airbags neither the
screen dividing the interior of the vehicle. doors nor the door panels should be modified
See your technical service to make this ad- in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the
justment. front door is damaged, the airbag system
may not work correctly. All work carried out Fig. 88 Switch for activating and deactivating
● There must be no other persons, animals or
on the front door must be done in a special- the front passenger airbag.
objects between the occupants of the outer
ised workshop.
seats and the deployment space of the head-
protection airbags so that the head-protec-
tion airbag can deploy completely without re-
striction and provide the greatest possible
protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have
not been expressly approved for use in your
vehicle may not be attached to the side win-
dows
● The built-in coat hooks should be used only
for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any
heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hang-
ers. Fig. 89 Centre side of dash panel: control
lamp for deactivated front passenger airbag
● The airbags provide protection for just one
in centre console.
accident; replace them once they have de-
ployed.

76
Airbag system

Read the additional information carefully   on the dash panel does ››› Fig. 89 not airbag is disabled, there may be a fault in the

Technical data
›››  page 14 light up ››› . airbag system:
If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front – The warning lamp   is illuminated for – Have the airbag system inspected imme-
passenger seat, the front passenger front air- 60 seconds in the centre part of the dash diately by a specialised workshop.
bag must be de-activated. panel. – Do not use a child seat on the front pas-
senger seat! The front passenger front
When the front passenger airbag is deactiva-
WARNING airbag could be triggered in the event of
ted, this means that only the front passenger an accident, even if there is a fault in the
front airbag is deactivated. All the other air- ● It is the driver's responsibility to ensure
system and, as a result, a child could sus-

Advice
bags in the vehicle remain activated. that the key-operated switch is set to the cor-
tain serious or fatal injuries.
rect position.
The warning lamps   and   ››› Fig. 89 ● You should deactivate the front passenger
– It is unpredictable whether the front pas-
light up for a few seconds when the ignition senger airbag will deploy in the event of
front airbag only if you have to use a rear-fac-
is switched on. After this, only the one that is an accident. Warn all your passengers of
ing child seat in exceptional cases
active remains lit. If the airbag is deactiva- this.
››› page 78, Safety for children.

Operation
ted,   remains permanently lit. If the air-
● Never install a child seat facing backwards
bag is activated,   lights up for 60 sec-
on the front passenger seat unless the front
onds approximately and then goes off. passenger front airbag has been disabled.
Otherwise, there is a risk of death.
Activating the front passenger front airbag ● As soon as the child seat is no longer nee-
– Switch the ignition off. ded on the front passenger seat, enable the

Emergencies
front passenger front airbag again.
– Open the door on the front passenger side.
● Only deactivate the front passenger front
– Insert the key blade into the slot of the airbag when the ignition is off, otherwise a
switch for deactivating the front passenger fault may occur in the airbag system, which
airbag ››› Fig. 88. About 3/4 of the key could cause the airbag to not deploy properly
blade should enter, as far as it will go. or not deploy at all in case of an accident.
● Never leave the key in the airbag disabling
– Then turn the key gently to the  position.
switch as it could get damaged or enable or

Safety
Do not force it if you feel resistance, and
disable the airbag during driving.
make sure you have inserted the key blade
fully. ● When the passenger airbag is deactivated,
if the control lamp      is not
– When the ignition is switched on, check continuously lit up when the front passenger
whether the control lamp   

77
Safety

Transporting children safely made by “Peke” (not for all countries) (see
www.seat.com).
Important information regarding the
front passenger's airbag
Safety for children These systems have been especially de-
Read the additional information carefully
signed and approved, complying with the
ECE-R44. regulation. ›››  page 15.
Introduction
SEAT recommends securing the child seats Read and always observe the safety informa-
For safety reasons, as we have learned from shown on the website as described below: tion included in the following chapters:
accident statistics, we recommend that chil-
● Child seats in the opposite direction of ● Safety distance with respect to the passen-
dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear
seats. Depending on their age, height and travel (group 0+): ISOFIX and support bracket ger airbag ››› page 72.
weight, children travelling in rear seats must (Peke G0 Plus + ISOFIX Base (RWF)). ● Objects between the passenger and the
use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea- ● Child seats in the direction of travel (group passenger side airbag ››› in Front airbags
sons, the child seat should be installed in the 1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (Peke G1 ISOFIX on page 74.
rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or DUO Plus).
in the centre back seat. The passenger side front airbag, when ena-
● Child seats in the direction of travel (group
bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing
The physical laws involved and the forces 2): seat belt and ISOFIX (Peke G3 KIDFIX) 1). backward since the airbag can strike the seat
acting in a collision apply also to children ● Child seats in the direction of travel (group with such force that it can cause serious or
››› page 69. But unlike adults, children do not 3): with seat belt (TAKATA MAXI PLUS©). fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old
have fully developed muscle and bone struc- should always travel on the rear seat.
tures. This means that children are subject to Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
a greater risk of injury. observe any statutory requirements when in- Therefore we strongly recommend you to
stalling and using child seats. Always read transport children on the rear seats. This is
To reduce the risk of injuries, children must and note ››› page 78. the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-
always use special child restraint systems ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-
when travelling in the vehicle. We recommend you always carry the manu-
bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 76.
facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-
We recommend the use of child safety prod- When transporting children, use a child seat
gether with the on-board documentation.
ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro- suitable for the age and size of each child
gramme, which includes systems for all ages ››› page 80.

1) Temporarily, the child seat recommended by the

Accessories Programme for groups 2 and 3 will be


ROMER KIDFIX XP© instead of Peke G3 KIDFIX. It is
available from the SEAT website.
78
Transporting children safely

WARNING ● Never allow a child to be transported in a ● When a child seat is mounted in the rear

Technical data
● If a child seat is secured to the front pas-
vehicle without being properly secured, or to seats, the door child-proof lock should be ac-
stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. tivated ››› page 119.
senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-
In an accident, the child could be flung
ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an
through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal in-
accident increases.
juries to themselves and to the other vehicle
● An inflating front passenger airbag can occupants. Child seats
strike the rear-facing child seat and project it
● If children assume an improper sitting posi-
with great force against the door, the roof or
tion when the vehicle is moving, they expose Safety instructions

Advice
the backrest.
themselves to greater risk of injury in the
● Never install a child seat facing backwards event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an Read the additional information carefully
on the front passenger seat unless the front accident. This is particularly important if the ›››  page 15.
passenger front airbag has been disabled. child is travelling on the front passenger seat
Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! and the airbag system is triggered in an acci-
However, if it is necessary, in exceptional ca- WARNING
dent; as this could cause serious injury or
ses, to transport a child in the front passen-

Operation
even death. When travelling, children must be secured in
ger seat, the front passenger front airbag the vehicle with a restraint system suitable
● A suitable child seat can protect your child!
must always be disabled ››› page 76, Deacti- for age, weight and size.
vation of front passenger front airbag*. If the ● Never leave a child alone in the child seat
● Read and always observe information and
passenger seat has a height adjustment op- or inside the vehicle because depending on
warnings concerning the use of child seats
tion, move it to the highest, most upright po- the season, very high temperatures may be
reached inside a parked vehicle, which could
››› page 78.
sition. If it has a fixed seat, place the seat as

Emergencies
far back as possible. be fatal.
● For those vehicles that do not include a key ● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall WARNING
lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehi- must not wear a normal seat belt without a The retaining rings are designed only for use
cle must be taken to a technical service. Do child seat, as this could cause injuries to the with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system child
not forget to reconnect the airbag when an abdominal and neck areas during a sudden seats.
adult wants to sit in the front passenger seat. braking manoeuvre or in an accident.
● Never secure other child seats that do not
● All vehicle occupants, especially children, ● Do not allow the seat belt to become twis- have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* system, or
must assume the proper sitting position and ted and the seat belt should be properly in

Safety
retaining belts or objects to the fastening
be properly belted in while travelling. place ››› page 67. rings - this can result in potentially fatal inju-
● Never hold children or babies on your lap, ● Only one child may occupy a child seat ries to the child.
this can result in potentially fatal injuries to ››› page 79, Child seats. ● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-
the child! rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* se-
curing rings. »
79
Safety

WARNING Group 3: From 22 to 36 kg (over around 7 ● Semi-universal: semi-universal approval, in


years old) addition to the standard requirements of uni-
An undue installation of the safety seat will
versal approval, requires safety devices to
increase the risk of injury in the event of a Child seats that have been tested and ap- lock the child seat, which require additional
crash. proved under the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129 testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap-
● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the standard bear the test mark ECE-R 44 or ECE- proval include a list of vehicle models for
luggage compartment. R 129 on the seat (the letter E in a circle with which they can be installed.
● Never secure or tie luggage or other items the test number below it).
● Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval
to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the upper
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and requires a dynamic test of the child seat for
ones (Top Tether).
observe any statutory requirements when in- each vehicle model separately. Child seats
stalling and using child seats. with vehicle-specific approval also include a
We recommend you to always include the list of vehicle models for which they can be
Categorisation of child seats into installed.
manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual
groups together with the on-board documentation. ● i-Size: Child seats with i-Size approval must
meet the requirements prescribed in the ECE-
Use only child seats that are officially ap- SEAT recommends you use child seats from
R 129 standard in relation to installation and
proved and suitable for the child. the Original Accessories Catalogue. These
safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you
child seats have been designed and tested
These seats are subject to the ECE-R 44 or which seats have i-Size approval for this vehi-
for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the
ECE-R 129 standard. ECE-R stands for: Eco- cle.
right child seat for your model and age group
nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.
at SEAT dealers.
The child seats are grouped into 5 catego-
ries: Child seats by approval category Attachment systems

Group 0: Up to 10 kg (up to around 9 Child seats may have the approval category Depending on the country, different attach-
months) of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific ment systems are used for safely installing
(all according to the ECE-R 44 standard) or i- child seats.
Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (up to around 18 Size (according to the ECE-R 129 standard).
months) Attachment systems overview
● Universal: Child seats with universal appro-
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4 val can be installed in all vehicles. There is ● ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach-
years old) no need to consult any list of models. In the ment system allowing quick and safe attach-
case of universal approval for ISOFIX, the ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at-
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7 child seat is additionally provided with a Top tachment establishes a rigid connection be-
years old) Tether belt. tween the child seat and the car body.
80
Transporting children safely

The child seat has two rigid attachment clips, available in the instructions for child restraint

Technical data
called connectors. These connectors are fit- systems.
ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found
between the seat cushion and the backrest of Recommended systems for attaching child
the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISOFIX seats
attachment systems are used mainly in Eu-
SEAT recommends attaching child seats as
rope ›››  page 18. If necessary, ISOFIX at-
follows:
tachment may have to be supplemented with
a Top Tether belt or a support bracket. ● Baby carriers or child seats in the opposite

Advice
direction of travel: ISOFIX and support brack-
● Automatic three-point seat belt. Whenever
et or iSize.
possible, it is preferable to attach the child
seats with the ISOFIX system rather than at- ● Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO-
taching them with an automatic three-point FIX and Top Tether.
seat belt ›››  page 16.

Operation
WARNING
Additional attachment: Incorrect use of the support bracket can
● Top Tether: The Top Tether belt is guided cause serious or fatal injury.
over the back of the rear seat and attached to ● Make sure the support bracket is correctly
an anchor point with a hook. Anchor points and safely installed.
are located at the back of the rear seat back-

Emergencies
rest on the boot side ›››  page 21. The
rings for retaining the Top Tether belt are
marked with an anchor symbol.
● Support bracket: Some child seats rest on
the floor of the vehicle with a support brack-
et. The support bracket prevents the child
seat from tipping forward in the event of im-

Safety
pact. Child seats fitted with a support bracket
should only be used in the passenger seat
and side rear seats ››› . For the assembly of
this type of seat you should also consult the
list of approved vehicles for this assembly,

81
Emergencies

Emergencies Note ● Box spanner for wheel bolts*

● The first-aid kit and the fire extinguisher ● Jack*


are not part of the vehicle's standard equip- ● Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cov-
Self-help ment. er*/wheel bolt cap clip.
● The first aid kit must comply with legal re-
Emergency equipment quirements. Some of the items listed are only provided in
certain model versions, or are optional ex-
● Observe the expiry date of the contents of
tras.
Emergency warning triangle* the first aid kit. After it has expired you
should purchase a new one.
The use of reflective warning triangles is WARNING
● The fire extinguisher must comply with le-
obligatory in emergencies in some countries. gal requirements. ● The factory-supplied jack is only designed
As are the first aid kit and a set of spare light for changing wheels on this model. On no ac-
● Ensure that the fire extinguisher is fully
bulbs. count attempt to use it for lifting heavier ve-
functional. The fire extinguisher should,
hicles or other loads. Risk of injury.
The warning triangle is under the storage therefore, be checked regularly. The sticker
on the fire extinguisher will inform you of the ● Use the jack only on a firm, level ground.
compartment which is located under the lug-
gage compartment floor. next date for checking. ● Never start the engine when the vehicle is
● Before acquiring accessories and emergen- on the jack. Risk of accident.
Note cy equipment see the instructions in “Acces- ● If work is to be carried out underneath the
sories and spares” ››› page 220. vehicle, this must be secured by suitable
● The warning triangle is not part of the vehi-
means. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury.
cle's standard equipment.
● The warning triangle should meet legal re-
quirements. Vehicle tools Note
The jack does not generally require any main-
Read the additional information carefully tenance. If required, it should be greased us-
›››  page 51 ing universal type grease.
First-aid kit and fire extinguisher*
Depending on the equipment, the tools and
The first-aid kit can go in the storage com- anti-puncture kit* are stored under the floor
partment which is located under the luggage panel in the luggage compartment.
compartment floor.
The tool kit includes:
The fire extinguisher* is attached to the lug-
gage compartment carpet with Velcro. ● Adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts*
● Towline anchorage
82
Self-help

Tyre repair WARNING manual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk of

Technical data
vehicle involuntary movement.
Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-
TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* gerous, especially when filling the tyre at the
roadside. Please observe the following rules WARNING
Read the additional information carefully to minimise the risk of injury:
A tyre filled with sealant does not have the
›››  page 50 ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. same performance properties as a conven-
The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System) Park it at a safe distance from surrounding tional tyre.
will reliably seal punctures caused by the traffic to fill the tyre.
● Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).

Advice
penetration of a foreign body of up to about ● Ensure the ground on which you park is flat
● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and
4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign ob- and solid.
fast cornering.
jects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre. ● All passengers and particularly children
● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum
must keep a safe distance from the work area.
After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre, speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check
you must again check the tyre pressure about ● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn the tyre.
10 minutes after starting the engine. other road users.

Operation
● Use the tyre mobility system only if you are
You should only use the tyre mobility set if For the sake of the environment
familiar with the necessary procedures. Oth-
the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are erwise, you should seek professional assis- Dispose of used or expired sealant observing
familiar with the procedure and you have the tance. any legal requirements.
necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you ● The tyre mobility set is intended for tempo-
should seek professional assistance. rary emergency use only until you can reach Note

Emergencies
the nearest specialised workshop.
Do not use the tyre sealant in the following ● A new bottle of sealant can be purchased at
● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mo- SEAT dealerships.
cases: bility set as soon as possible.
● Take into account the separate instruction
● If the wheel rim has been damaged. ● The sealant is a health hazard and must be manual of the tyre mobility set* manufactur-
● In outside temperatures below -20 °C cleaned immediately if it comes into contact er.
(-4 °F). with the skin.
● In the event of cuts or perforations in the ● Always keep the tyre mobility set out of the

Safety
tyre greater than 4 mm. reach of small children.
● Never use a jack, even if it has been ap-
● If you have been driving with very low pres-
proved for your vehicle.
sure or a completely flat tyre.
● Always stop the engine, apply the hand-
● If the sealant bottle has passed its use by
brake lever firmly and engage gear if using a
date.
83
Emergencies

Contents of the tyre mobility system* 7 Warning provided by tyre pressure moni- heating! Before switching on the air compres-
toring system (it can also be integrated in sor again, let it cool for several minutes.
the inflator tube).
8 Tube for inflating tyres
9 12 volt connector Check after 10 minutes of driving
10 Bottle of sealant
Screw in the inflator tube ››› Fig. 90 8 again
11 Spare tyre valve and check the pressure on the gauge 7 .
The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at the
lower end for a valve insert. The valve insert 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower:
can only be screwed or unscrewed in this ● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed
way. This also applies to its replacement part sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.
11 . ● You should obtain professional assistance
››› .
Fig. 90 Standard representation: contents of WARNING
the anti-puncture kit. When inflating the wheel, the air compressor 1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:
and the inflator tube may become hot. ● Set the tyre pressure to the correct value
The anti-puncture kit is located underneath
● Protect hands and skin from hot parts. again.
the floor covering in the luggage compart-
ment. It includes the following components ● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube or ● Carefully resume your journey, without ex-
››› Fig. 90: hot air compressor on flammable material. ceeding 80 km/h (50 mph), until you reach
● Allow them to cool before storing the de- the nearest specialised workshop and re-
1 Valve insert remover vice. place the tyre.
2 Sticker indicating maximum speed “max. ● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at
80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph” least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is WARNING
3 Filler tube with cap too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a
Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous
good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-
4 Air compressor and can cause accidents and serious injury.
tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
● Do not continue driving if the tyre pressure
5 ON/OFF switch
is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.
6 Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated CAUTION
● Seek specialist assistance.
in the inflator tube). Switch off the air compressor after a maxi-
mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid over-

84
Self-help

Changing the windscreen wiper ● Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all Towing or tow-starting

Technical data
windows regularly.
blades
● The wiper blades should be changed once General information
or twice a year.
Changing the windscreen and rear Read the additional information carefully
window wiper blades ›››  page 56.
CAUTION
Read the additional information carefully ● Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could Tow-starting means starting the engine of
›››  page 59. scratch the glass. the vehicle while another pulls it.

Advice
Perfect wiper blade condition is essential for ● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint Towing means one vehicle pulling another
clear vision. Damaged wiper blades should thinner or similar products to clean the win- that is not roadworthy.
be replaced immediately. dows. This could damage the windscreen
wiper blades. If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access
The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as ● Never move any windscreen wiper by hand.
system, towing is only allowed with the igni-
standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is This could cause damage. tion on!

Operation
responsible for ensuring that the wipe is si- The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is
● To prevent damage to the bonnet and the
lent. If the graphite layer is damaged, the towed with the engine switched off and the
windscreen wiper arms, the latter should only
noise of the water as it is wiped across the be lifted off the windscreen when in service ignition connected. Depending on the battery
windscreen will be louder. position. charge status, the drop in voltage may be so
Check the condition of the wiper blades regu- large, even after just a few minutes, that no
electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g.

Emergencies
larly. If the wipers scrape across the glass, Note
they should be changed if they are damaged, the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with
● The windscreen wiper arms can be moved
or cleaned if they are dirty ››› . the Keyless Access system, the steering
to the service position only when the bonnet
wheel could lock up
If this does not produce the desired results, is properly closed.
the setting angle of the windscreen wiper ● You can also use the service position, for WARNING
arms might be incorrect. They should be example, if you want to fix a cover over the
checked by a specialised workshop and cor- windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of If the vehicle has no electrical power, the
rected if necessary. ice. brake lights, turn signals and all other lights

Safety
will no longer function. Do not have the vehi-
cle towed away. Failure to follow this instruc-
WARNING
tion could result in an accident. »
Do not drive unless you have good visibility
through all windows!

85
Emergencies

WARNING For technical reasons, towing the following deactivated. If the vehicle has no power sup-
vehicles is not allowed: ply or there is an electric system fault, the
The risk of accidents is high when tow-start-
engine must be tow-started to deactivate the
ing, for example, the towed vehicle can easily ● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
electronic parking brake and the electronic
be driven into the towing vehicle.
● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be- lock of the steering column.
cause in vehicles with the Keyless Access
CAUTION locking and ignition system the steering re-
If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubricant mains locked and the electronic parking Anchoring the front tow line
in the automatic transmission the car may brake cannot be deactivated nor can the elec-
only be towed with the driven wheels lifted tronic lock of the steering column be re-
clear of the road, or transported on a special leased if they are activated.
car transporter or trailer. ● If the battery is flat, it is possible that the
engine control units may not operate correct-
CAUTION ly.
Do not tow a vehicle for more than 50 m in at-
tempt to start it. There is risk of damage to However, if the vehicle must absolutely be
the catalytic converter. tow-started (in the case of manual gearbox-
es):
Note ● Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear.
● Keep the clutch pressed down. Fig. 91 Right side of the front bumper: tow-
● Please observe related legal requirements.
line anchorage screwed in.
● Switch on the hazard warning lights of both ● Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn-
vehicles. However, observe any regulations ing lights. The front towline anchorage is only mounted
to the contrary. ● Once both vehicles are moving, release the if the vehicle has to be towed.
● The tow rope must not be twisted. Other- clutch. There is a cover with an opening into which
wise the front tow line anchorage could be ● Once the engine starts, press the clutch
pulled off the vehicle.
the towline anchorage is screwed on the right
and disengage the gear to avoid colliding part of the front bumper.
with the towing vehicle.
– Take the towline anchorage from the on-
Indications for tow-starting Note
board tool set.

The vehicle can only be tow-started if the – Remove the front cover by pressing down
Vehicle's should not generally be tow-star- on its left-hand side.
electronic parking brake and, if appropriate,
ted. The jump start should be used instead
the electronic lock of the steering column are
›››  page 57.
86
Self-help

– Bolt the anchorage to its limit to the left, in WARNING

Technical data
the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 91.
● If the towline anchorage is not screwed in
After use, unscrew the towline anchorage as far as the stop, there is a risk of the screw
and fit the cover back on the bumper. Put the connection shearing off during towing (acci-
towline anchorage back in the vehicle tool dent risk).
kit. The towline anchorage should always be ● If your car has a towing bracket, only use
kept in the vehicle. special towing ropes. Risk of accident!

Advice
CAUTION
Rear towline anchorage In vehicles fitted with a towing bracket, only
Fig. 93 Right side of the rear bumper: towline
anchorage screwed in. use special tow bars to prevent damage to
the ball joint. These tow bars have been spe-
The rear towline anchorage should only be cially approved for use with towing brackets.
mounted if you wish to tow another vehicle.

Operation
Vehicles with towline anchorage Towing vehicles with a manual gear-
On the right of the rear bumper there is a cov- box
er which covers a threaded hole.
Towing is relatively straightforward.
– Take the towline anchorage out of the vehi-

Emergencies
cle tool set ››› page 82. Please observe the relevant instructions
Fig. 92 Right side of the rear bumper: cover- ››› page 85.
– To open the cover press it on the top right
cap. The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or
area ››› Fig. 92.
tow rope in the normal way, with all four
– Screw the towline anchorage into the screw wheels on the road; it can also be towed with
connection as far as it will go ››› Fig. 93 and either the front or rear wheels lifted off the
tighten with the wheel brace. road. The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h

Safety
After use, unscrew the towline anchorage (30 mph).
and put it back in the vehicle tool kit. Replace
the cover on the bumper. The towline anchor-
age should always be kept in the vehicle.

87
Emergencies

Towing a vehicle equipped with auto- Note Fuses and bulbs


matic gearbox ● If it is not possible to tow the vehicle in the

Certain restrictions must be observed when


normal way, or if it has to be towed further Fuses
than 50 km (30 miles), it must be transported
towing your vehicle. on a special car transporter or trailer.
Introduction
Please observe the relevant instructions ● Should the power supply to the selector
››› page 85. lever be interrupted in position P, the selector In general, a fuse can be assigned to various
lever will be locked. Before the vehicle can be electrical components. Likewise, an electrical
The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar or recovered/manoeuvred, you must manually
tow rope in the normal way, with all four component can be protected by several
release the selector lever.
wheels on the ground. When doing so, fuses.
please note the following points: Only replace fuses when the cause of the
● Make sure the selector lever is in the N po- problem has been solved. If a newly inserted
fuse blows after a short time, you must have
sition.
the electrical system checked by a special-
● The vehicle must not be towed faster than ised workshop as soon as possible.
50 km/h (30 mph).
● The vehicle must not be towed further than WARNING
50 km (30 miles). Reason: when the engine The high voltages in the electrical system can
is not running, the gearbox oil pump does give serious electrical shocks, causing burns
not work and the gearbox is not adequately and even death!
lubricated for higher speeds or longer distan- ● Never touch the electrical wiring of the igni-
ces. tion system.
If the vehicle has to be towed with a break- ● Take care not to cause short circuits in the
down truck, it must only be suspended at the electrical system.
front wheels. Reason: the drive shafts are lo-
cated on the front wheels. If the car is towed WARNING
with the rear wheels lifted off the road (I.e.
Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or
travelling backwards), the drive shafts also
bridging a current circuit without fuses can
turn backwards. The planetary gears in the cause a fire and serious injury.
automatic gearbox then turn at such high
speeds that the gearbox will be severely
damaged in a short time.
88
Fuses and bulbs

● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only ● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap- No. Consumer/Amps

Technical data
replace fuses with a fuse of the same amper- pear in the following tables.
age (same colour and markings) and size. Switch for lights, LSS and SMLS steer-
● Some of the equipment listed in the tables
13 ing column, diagnostic port, rain/light 7.5
● Never repair a fuse. below pertain only to certain versions of the sensor
● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, staple model or are optional extras.
or similar. ● Please note that the above lists, while cor- 14 LSS steering column: cleaner control 10
rect at the time of printing, are subject to 15 Instrument panel 7.5
change.
CAUTION
16 Right Hand Lights Feed 40

Advice
● To prevent damage to the vehicle's electric
system, before replacing a fuse always turn 17 Left door electric windows 30
off the ignition, the lights and all electrical Fuses to the left of the instrument
18 Windscreen wipers 30
elements and remove the key from the igni- panel
tion. 19 Radio, Multimedia System 25
● If you replace a fuse with higher-rating Read the additional information carefully

Operation
›››  page 48 20 Heated Rear Window 30
fuse, you could cause damage to another part
of the electrical system. Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same 21 SCR Control Unit 30
● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre- amperage (same colour and markings) and 23 Rear View Camera 7.5
vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can size.
damage the electrical system. Telephone dock, external audio source
No. Consumer/Amps 24 connection (Double USB-Aux IN), tele- 7.5

Emergencies
● Always carefully remove the fuse box cov-
phone amplifier, MIB screen
ers and refit them correctly to avoid problems
with your vehicle. 1 Towing Hook 20
25 Electronic Steering Column (MFL) 7.5
3 Sound amplifier 30
26 Gateway 7.5
Note
5 Panoramic Roof 30
27 Active Suspension Control Unit 7.5
● One component may have more than one
fuse. 6 Central locking 40
28 DWA sensor 7.5

Safety
● Several components may run on a single 8 Climatronic fresh air fan 30
29 DWA horn 7.5
fuse.
10 Towing Hook 20
● In the vehicle, there are more fuses than 9AA/9AB Clima control unit 7.5
those indicated in this chapter. These should 11 CNG solenoid valves 7.5 31
9AK Climatronic Control unit 15
only be changed by a specialised workshop.
32 LSS Steering Column, without Kessy 7.5 »
89
Emergencies

No. Consumer/Amps No. Consumer/Amps No. Consumer/Amps


33 Right door electric windows 30 56 Air blower 30 Pressure Transducer, EPW Solenoid
Valve, TOG Sensor, PWM fan, Variable
35 Left Hand Lights Feed 40 58 Double Water Pump 7.5 5 15
Valve Distributor, Active Carbon Valve
and Oil Pressure Valve (TSI)
36 Horn Signal 20 59 Heated rear-view mirrors 10
Ignition coils (MPI and TSI) 30
37 Heated seats control unit 30 60 Towing Hook 30
6 Preheating Plugs Relay, Intake Pipe El-
38 BCM Power C63 30 61 Towing Hook 30 7.5
ement (Diesel)
39 BSD, PDC, MRR 10 7 Vacuum Pump (TSI) 15
Light switch, diagnostic port, head- Fuse arrangement in engine compart- EKP Injectors and Relay Coil (MPI and
light range control, LSS steering col- 8 10
40 7.5 ment CNG), Fuel dosing valve (Diesel)
umn: lights, halogen headlights, re-
verse switch 9 Servo Sensor 7.5
Read the additional information carefully
41
Electrochromic mirror, adjustment of
7.5 ›››  page 48 10 Vref Battery: Gateway, BDM and BCM 7.5
exterior mirrors not folded in.
Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same Engine Injection Module, HauptRelé
Clutch pedal, starter relays, CNG/SCR 14 15
42 7.5 amperage (same colour and markings) and Engine, ESC
relay coil
size. 15 DQ200 and AQ160 Automatic Gearbox 30
43 DWP relay coil, window washer motor 15
No. Consumer/Amps 17 50 Diag 7.5
44 Airbag 7.5
1 Engine injection module 30 18 Starter Motor. 30
45 Leimo Plus Left Headlight 7.5
Fuel dosing valve (TJ4/T6P/TJ7), Low ESC (Pump) 60
46 Leimo Plus Right Headlight 7.5 temperature coolant pump 20
2 (TJ4/T6P/TJ7); Oil Pressure Adjuster 7.5 ABS (Pump) 40
Steering Column Lock, Kessy Control
48 7.5 valve (TJ1), Cooling Valve AGR (TJ1),
Unit 21 ESC/ABS (Valves) 25
High and Low Water Pumps (TJ1)
49 SCR Relay Coil 7.5 TH4 fan without AC for countries with
3 Lambda sensors 15 24 30
moderate climate
51 AA pressure sensor, Heated nozzles 7.5
Petrol engine pump relay (MPI), Gauge
4 15
53 Automatic gearbox lever, ZSS 7.5 Control Unit (TSI and Diesel)

55 Lighter 30
90
Fuses and bulbs

No. Consumer/Amps Depending on how equipped the vehicle is, CAUTION

Technical data
there are different sets of headlights and tail
● Remove the ignition key before working on
TH4 fan with AC or T5I for countries
20 lights:
with moderate climate the electric system. Otherwise, a short circuit
25
● Halogen headlights could occur.
PTC1 40 ● Switch off the lights or parking lights be-
● Full-LED main headlights*
TJ1/TJ4/TJ7/T6P or TH4/T5I fan for fore you change a bulb.
26 50 ● Halogen headlights with LED daytime run-
countries with moderate climate
ning lights*
TH4 fan with AC or T5I for countries For the sake of the environment

Advice
30 ● Rear bulb light
27 with moderate climate Please ask your specialist retailer how to dis-
● LED rear light*
pose of used bulbs in the proper manner.
PTC2 40

28 PTC3 40 Full-LED headlight system*


Note
Full-LED headlights handle all light functions
● Depending on weather conditions (cold or
(daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped

Operation
beam and route light) with light emitting di- wet), the front lights, the fog lights, the tail
Changing bulbs odes (LEDs) as a light source.
lights and the turn signals may be temporari-
ly misted. This has no influence on the useful
Full-LED headlights are designed to last the life of the lighting system. By switching on
General notes the lights, the area through which the beam
lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be
replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to of light is projected will quickly be demisted.
Read the additional information carefully

Emergencies
an authorised workshop to have it replaced. However, the edges may continue to be mis-
›››  page 49 ted.
Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of WARNING ● Please check at regular intervals that all
practical skill. lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on
● Take particular care when working on com-
your vehicle is functioning properly. This is
If you choose to change the engine compart- ponents in the engine compartment if the en-
not only in the interest of your own safety,
ment lamps yourself, remember that it is a gine is warm, there is a risk of burns.
but also that of all other road users.
dangerous area ››› in safety notes for work ● Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The
● Before changing a bulb, make sure you

Safety
in the engine compartment on page 232. glass can break when you touch the bulb,
have the correct new bulb.
causing injury.
Always use identical bulbs with the same ● Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with
● When changing bulbs, please take care not
designation. The name can be found on the your bare hands, use a cloth or paper towel
base of the bulb holder. to injure yourself on sharp parts in the head-
instead. The residue left by the fingerprints »
light housing.

91
Emergencies

would vaporise as a result of the heat gener- Main beam Dipped beam headlight
ated by the bulb, they will be deposited on
the reflector and will impair its surface.

Halogen headlights
Position of the bulbs

Fig. 95 In the engine compartment: main Fig. 96 In the engine compartment: remove
beam headlight bulb. the lid.

– Raise the bonnet.


– Turn cover 1 anti-clockwise and take it out
››› Fig. 95.
– Remove lamp connector 2 by pulling out-
Fig. 94 Halogen headlights. ward.
– Remove the bulb by pulling it out and fit
A Turn signal the new one.
B Main beam headlights
– Install the bulb connector 2 .
C Dipped beam headlights
– Fit cover 1 by turning it clockwise. Fig. 97 In the engine compartment: dipped
D DRL (daytime running light)/side light beam headlight.
– Check whether the new bulb is working.
– Raise the bonnet.
– Move the loop ››› Fig. 96 1 in the direction
of the arrow and remove the cover.
– Remove the bulb connector ››› Fig. 97 2 .

92
Fuses and bulbs

– Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 97 3 Turn signal and DRL (daytime running Changing the fog light bulbs

Technical data
pressing inwards to the right. light)/side light1)
– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so Front fog light bulb
that the lug on the base fits into the recess
on the reflector.
– Fit the connector.
– Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure
that the gasket sits well on the casing cover

Advice
during the operation.
– Check whether the new bulb is working.

Fig. 98 In the engine compartment: turn sig-

Operation
nal bulb 1 and DRL (daytime running light)
bulb 2 .

– Raise the bonnet.


– Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 98 1 or 2 to
the left and pull.

Emergencies
– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb
holder and turning it anticlockwise at the
same time.
– Installation involves all of the above steps Fig. 99 Front fog light.
in reverse sequence.
Follow the steps indicated: »

Safety
1) In headlight versions with LED DRL, this light

source cannot be replaced. It is designed to last the


lifetime of the car. In case of a failure, go to an au-
thorised workshop to have it replaced.
93
Emergencies

1. Lever with a screwdriver in the notch Changing the tail light bulbs Changing bulbs
››› Fig. 99  (arrow). Subsequently, re-
move the clips located on the edge of
Tail light summary
the grill with gentle leverage.
2. Remove both bolts 1  and leverage Bulb light
clip 2 to remove the fog light.
Left Right
3. Remove the bulb connector.
4. Turn the bulb holder to the left and pull. Brake lights
2 x P21WLL 2 x P21WLL
5. Remove the bulb by pressing on it and Side lights
turning it anticlockwise at the same
Retro fog light W21W –
time.
6. Replace the bulb, making sure that the Reverse light – W16W Fig. 100 Luggage compartment: access to the
securing guides are in the right position, bolt securing the tail light unit.
Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL
press on it and turn it clockwise.
7 To install the headlight, go through the LED lights.
above steps in reverse sequence.
8. Check that the bulb works properly. Left Right
Brake lights LED LED

Side lights LED LED

Retro fog light LED –

Reverse light – W16W

Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL Fig. 101 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail
light.
The tables correspond to a right-hand traffic
vehicle. The position of lights may vary ac- Follow the steps indicated:
cording to the country.
1. Check which of the bulbs is defective.
2. Open the rear lid.

94
Fuses and bulbs

3. Remove the lid, levering it with the flat Number plate light Changing the interior light

Technical data
side of a screwdriver into the recess
››› Fig. 100 1 . – Insert the flat part of a screwdriver into the bulbs
4. Remove the bulb connector 2 . special slot and remove the bulb.
Interior light and front reading lights
5. Unscrew the light securing bolt by hand – Remove the bulb holder, by turning it until
or using a screwdriver 3 . it is free.
6. Remove the light from the body, gently – Change the bulb.
pulling it toward you, and place on a
– Replace the bulb holder, by turning it until

Advice
clean, smooth surface.
it fits fully.
7. Remove the bulb holder unlocking the
retaining tabs ››› Fig. 101 A . – Fit the light into the space and press until
you hear a “click”.
8. Change the damaged bulb.
9. To refit follow the steps in reverse order,

Operation
taking special care when fitting the bulb Additional brake light
holder. The securing tabs must click into Fig. 102 Front reading light.
place. Given the difficulty involved in the replace-
ment of this light it should be done by Tech- To remove the glass
CAUTION nical Services.
– Insert a fine screwdriver between the cas-
Take care when removing the rear light unit to ing and the glass ››› Fig. 102.

Emergencies
make sure there is no damage to the paint-
work or any of its components. – Carefully remove the glass, levering it to
avoid possible damage.
Note
To replace the bulbs
● Make sure you have a soft cloth ready to
place under the glass on the rear light unit, to – Pull the bulbs outwards.
avoid any scratches. – To remove the central bulb, hold and press

Safety
● For LED pilots, you can only change the turn to one side.
signal and reverse bulb.
Assembly
– Proceed in the reverse order, pressing gen-
tly on the outer edge of the side light. »
95
Emergencies

– First fit the glass with the fastening tabs


over the frame of the switch. Next press the
front part until the two long tabs click on
the support.

Note
Light sources cannot be replaced in LED cour-
tesy lights. If the light does not work please
go to an Official Service.

Fig. 104 Boot light.


Luggage compartment light*
– Extract the bulb by pressing on its inside
edge -arrow- using the flat side of a screw-
driver ››› Fig. 103.
– Press the bulb sideways and remove it from
its housing ››› Fig. 104.

Fig. 103 Boot light.

96
Operation

Fig. 105 Dash panel.

98
Controls and displays

Operation – Windscreen wipers and washer . . 132 20 Starter button (Keyless Access lock-

Technical data
– Window washer-wiper system* . . 132 ing and ignition system) . . . . . . . . . . 158
– Multi-function display control* . . 27 21 Depending on the equipment:
Controls and displays – USB/AUX-IN input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
10 Infotainment system:
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 – Connectivity Box / Wireless
General instrument panel 11
Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
12 Depending on the equipment,
1 Electric window controls* . . . . . . . . . 122 glove compartment with: . . . . . . . . . 139 22 Driver's seat heating control* . . . . . 137

Advice
2 Door release lever – CD player* and/or SD card* 23 Ignition lock (vehicles without Key-
3 Control for adjusting electric exteri- ››› Booklet Radio less Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
or mirrors* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 13 Passenger airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 24 Steering column control lever* . . . . 13
4 Air vents 14 Front passenger airbag deactiva- 25 Fuse housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
5 Lever for: tion switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 26 Bonnet release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Operation
– Turn signals/main beam head- 15 Switches for: 27 Headlight range control* . . . . . . . . . . 131
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 – Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . 148 28 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
– Cruise control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 – Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Note
6 Depending on equipment fitted: – Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
● Some of the equipment listed in this sec-
– Lever for cruise control . . . . . . . . . . 178 16 Passenger seat heating control* . . 137 tion is only fitted on certain models or are op-

Emergencies
7 Steering wheel with horn and 17 Gear lever tional extras.
– Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 – Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 ● A separate Instructions Manual is enclosed
– On-board computer controls . . . . 27 if the vehicle is equipped with a factory-fitted
18 Depending on the equipment, but-
radio, CD player, AUX IN connection or navi-
– Controls for radio, telephone, tons for:
gation system.
navigation and speech dialogue – Central locking* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 ● The arrangement of switches and controls
system ››› Booklet Radio
– Start-Stop operation button . . . . . 175 on right-hand drive models* may be slightly

Safety
8 Instrument panel and warning different from the layout shown in ››› page 99.
– SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
lamps: However, the symbols used to identify the
– Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 controls are the same.
– Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
– Tyre pressure monitoring* . . . . . . . 247
– Warning and indication lamps . . . 36
19 Handbrake lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
9 Lever for:
99
Operation

Instruments and warning/control lamps


Instruments
General instrument panel

Fig. 106 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

The layout of the instruments depends upon change up a gear or move the selector 5 Speedometer.
the model and the engine. lever to D (or lift your foot off the acceler- 6 Fuel gauge ››› page 104.
ator) before the needle reaches the red
1 Rev counter (with the engine running, in zone ››› . WARNING
hundreds of revolutions per minute)
››› page 101. 2 Engine coolant temperature display Any distraction may lead to an accident, with
››› page 103. the risk of injury.
The beginning of the red zone of the rev
3 Displays on the screen ››› page 101. ● Do not operate the instrument panel con-
counter indicates the maximum speed in
any gear after running-in and with the en- 4 Adjuster button and display trols when driving.
gine hot. However, it is advisable to ››› page 103.
100
Instruments and warning/control lamps

CAUTION CAUTION ● Service interval display ›››  page 32.

Technical data
● When the engine is cold, avoid high revs ● Second speed display ›››  page 27.
Never allow the rev counter needle 1
and heavy acceleration and do not make the ››› Fig. 106 to go into the red zone on the ● Speed warning function ›››  page 32.
engine work hard. scale for more than a very brief period, other- ● Start-Stop system status display
wise there is a risk of engine damage.
››› page 175.
● Identifying letters on engine (MKB).
Rev counter For the sake of the environment
Changing up a gear early will help you to save Distance travelled

Advice
The rev counter indicates the number of en- fuel and minimise emissions and engine
gine revolutions per minute ››› Fig. 106 1 . noise.
The odometer registers the total distance
travelled by the car.
Together with the gear-change indicator, the
rev counter offers you the possibility of using The odometer (trip) shows the distance
the engine of your vehicle at a suitable Indications on the display travelled since the last odometer reset. The
speed. last digit of the trip recorder indicates distan-

Operation
A variety of information can be viewed on the ces of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile.
The start of the red zone on the dial indicates
instrument panel display ››› Fig. 106 3 de-
the maximum engine speed which may be ● Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 106 4 to re-
used briefly when the engine is warm and af- pending on the vehicle equipment:
set the trip recorder to 0.
ter it has been run in properly. Before reach- ● Bonnet, rear lid and doors open ● Keep the button 4 pressed for about 3
ing this range, you should change to a higher ›››  page 29. seconds and the previous value will be dis-

Emergencies
gear for vehicles with a manual gearbox or for
● Information and warning texts. played.
automatic gearboxes put the selector lever in
“D” or take your foot off the accelerator ped- ● Mileage.
Time
al. ● Time.
● To set the time, keep the button ››› Fig. 106
We recommend that you avoid high revs and ● Navigation instructions.
4 pressed for more than 3 seconds to select
that you follow the recommendations on the ● Outside temperature. the hour or minute display.
gear-change indicator. Consult the additional
● Compass. ● To continue setting the time, press button

Safety
information in ›››  page 29, Gear-change
● Shift lever position. 4 . Hold button down to scroll through the
indicator.
numbers quickly.
● Recommended gear (manual gearbox)
›››  page 29. ● Press the button 4 again in order to finish
● Multifunction display (MFD) and menus
setting the time. »
with different setting options ›››  page 27.
101
Operation

The time can also be set via the  button Speed warning ● At outside temperatures above +4°C
and Setup function button in the Easy Con- When the speed setting is exceeded, this will (+39°F), even when the “ice crystal symbol”
nect system ››› page 105. be indicated on the instrument panel display. is not visible, there may still be patches of ice
This is very useful, for example when using on the road.
Compass winter tyres that are not designed for driving ● Do not rely on the outside temperature in-
With the ignition on and the navigation sys- at the maximum speed of the vehicle dicator!
tem on, the cardinal point corresponding to ›››  page 32.
the direction of travel of the vehicle is dis- The speed warning settings can be adjusted Note
played on the instrument panel. in the Easy Connect system via the  button ● Different versions of the instrument panel
and the Setup function button ››› page 105. are available and therefore the versions and
Selector lever position instructions on the display may vary. In the
The selected gear is displayed on the side of Start-Stop operating display case of displays without warning or informa-
the selector lever and on the instrument pan- tion texts, faults are indicated exclusively by
Updated information relating to the status is the warning lamps.
el display. In positions D and S, and with the displayed on the instrument panel
Tiptronic, the corresponding gear is also dis- ● Depending on the equipment, some set-
››› page 175. tings and instructions can also be carried out
played.
in the Easy Connect system.
Identifying letters on engine (MKB)
Recommended gear (manual gearbox) ● When several warnings are active at the
Hold the button ››› Fig. 106 4 down for more same time, the symbols are shown succes-
The recommended gear in order to save fuel than 15 seconds to display the identifying sively for a few seconds and will stay on until
is displayed on the instrument panel while letters of the vehicle engine (MKB). To do the fault is rectified.
you are driving ›››  page 29. this, the ignition must be switched on and
the engine switched off.
Second speed display (mph or km/h)
In addition to the speedometer, the speed WARNING
can also be displayed in a different unit of Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning
measurement (in miles or in km per hour). symbols on page 104.
This option cannot be deactivated in models
destined for countries in which the second WARNING
speed must always be visible.
Even though outside temperatures are above
The second speed display can be adjusted in freezing, some roads and bridges may be icy.
the Easy Connect system via the  button
and the Setup function button ››› page 105.
102
Instruments and warning/control lamps

Odometer Fault display ue lighting up and reach the upper zone. This

Technical data
If there is a fault in the instrument panel, the is no cause for concern, provided the control
letters DEF will appear in the trip recorder lamp  does not light up on the instrument
display. Have the fault repaired immediately, panel digital display.
as far as is possible.
Heat range
When the diodes light up in the upper area of
Coolant temperature gauge the display and the control lamp appears 
on the instrument panel display, the coolant

Advice
For vehicles with no coolant temperature temperature is excessive ››› page 238.
gauge, a control lamp  appears for high
coolant temperatures ››› page 238. Please CAUTION
Fig. 107 Instrument panel: odometer and re- note ››› . ● To ensure a long useful life for the engine,
set button. avoid high revs, driving at high speed and
The coolant temperature gauge 2

Operation
››› Fig. 106 only works when the ignition is making the engine work hard for approxi-
The distance covered is displayed in “kilome- mately the first 15 minutes when the engine
tres” or miles “m”. It is possible to change switched on. In order to avoid engine dam-
is cold. The phase until the engine is warm al-
the measurement units (kilometres age, please read the following notes for the
so depends on the outside temperature. If
“km”/miles “m”) in the radio/Easy Connect*. different temperature ranges. necessary, use the engine oil temperature*
Please refer to the Easy Connect* Instructions ›››  page 31 as a guide.
Manual for more details. Engine cold

Emergencies
● Additional lights and other accessories in
If only the diodes in the lower part of the front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect
Odometer/trip recorder scale light up, this indicates that the engine of the coolant. At high outside temperatures
has not yet reached operating temperature. and high engine loads, there is a risk of the
The odometer shows the total distance cov-
Avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and engine overheating.
ered by the vehicle.
do not make the engine work hard. ● The front spoiler also ensures proper distri-
The trip recorder shows the distance that has bution of the cooling air when the vehicle is
been travelled since it was last reset. It is Normal temperature moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can re-

Safety
used to measure short trips. The last digit of duce the cooling effect, which could cause
the trip recorder indicates distances of 100 If in normal operations, the diodes light up the engine to overheat. Seek specialist assis-
metres or tenths of a mile. until the central zone, it means that the en- tance.
gine has reached operating temperature. At
The trip recorder can be set to zero by press- high outside temperatures and when making
ing 0.0/SET ››› Fig. 107. the engine work hard, the diodes may contin-
103
Operation

Fuel level Warning and control lamps ● Engine oil pressure symbol  with the
warning message STOP ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE LOW! INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
Warning symbols
Read the additional information carefully Warning messages, Priority 2 (yellow)
›››  page 36 If one of these faults occurs, the correspond-
There are red warning symbols (priority 1) ing warning lamp lights up and is accompa-
and yellow warning symbols (priority 2). nied by an audible warning. Check the corre-
sponding function as soon as possible al-
Warning messages, Priority 1 (red) though the vehicle may be used without risk.
If one of these faults occurs, the warning If several priority 2 warning messages are de-
lamp will light up or flash and will be accom- tected at the same time, the symbols are dis-
Fig. 108 Fuel gauge.
panied by three audible warnings. This is a played one after the other for about 2 sec-
danger warning. Stop the vehicle and switch onds at a time. After a set time, the informa-
The display 6 ››› Fig. 106 only works when
off the engine. Check the fault and correct it. tion text will disappear and the symbol will
the ignition is switched on. When the display
Obtain professional assistance if necessary. be shown as a reminder at the side of the
reaches the reserve mark, the lower diode
display.
lights up in red and the control lamp  ap- If several priority 1 faults are detected at the
pears ››› page 100. When the fuel level is very same time, the symbols will be displayed one Priority 2 warning messages will not be
low, the lower diode flashes in red. after the other for about 2 seconds at a time shown until all Priority 1 warning messages
and will continue until the fault is corrected. have been dealt with!
The distance to empty fuel level is displayed
on the instrument panel 3 ››› Fig. 106. No menus will be shown in the display for the
Examples of priority 2 warning reports (yel-
duration of a priority 1 warning message.
You can consult the tank capacity of your ve- low):*
hicle in the ›››  page 45 section.
Examples of priority 1 warning messages ● Fuel warning light with the information text
(red) PLEASE REFUEL.
CAUTION
● Brake system symbol  with the warning
Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An ir- WARNING
regular fuel supply could cause misfiring. In message STOP BRAKE FLUID INSTRUC-
this way the unburned fuel can reach the ex- TION MANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT IN- If the warning lamps and messages are ignor-
haust system, which could cause the catalytic STRUCTION MANUAL. ed, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may
converter to overheat resulting in damage. cause accidents and severe injuries.
● Coolant symbol  with the warning mes-
● Never ignore the warning lamps or text
sage STOP SEE COOLANT INSTRUCTION
messages.
MANUAL.
104
Introduction to the Easy Connect system*

● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Introduction to the Easy Function buttons in the Page

Technical data
vehicle settings
● Park the vehicle away from traffic and en-
sure that there are no highly flammable ma-
Connect system* menu
terials under the vehicle that could come into
ESC system ››› page 164
contact with the exhaust system (e.g. dry System settings (CAR)*
grass, fuel). Tyres ››› page 247
● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci- CAR menu Driver assistance ››› table on page 25
dent for the driver and for other road users. If
necessary, switch on the hazard warning Read the additional information carefully

Advice
Parking and manoeuvring ››› page 201
lamps and put out the warning triangle to ad- ›››  page 25
vise other drivers. Vehicle lights ››› table on page 25
● Before opening the bonnet, switch off the
To select the settings menus, press the Easy
Connect  button and the Setup function Mirrors and windscreen wipers ››› table on page 25
engine and allow it to cool.
button. Opening and closing ››› table on page 25
● In any vehicle, the engine compartment is a

Operation
hazardous area and could cause severe inju- The actual number of menus available and Multifunction display ››› table on page 25
ries ››› page 232. the name of the various options in these me-
nus will depend on the vehicle’s electronics Date and time ››› table on page 25
CAUTION and equipment.
Units ››› table on page 25
Failure to heed the control lamps and text Pressing the menu button will always take
Service ››› page 101
messages when they appear may result in you to the last menu used.

Emergencies
faults in the vehicle.
When the function button checkbox is activa- Factory settings ››› table on page 25
ted , the function is active.
WARNING
Pressing the menu button  will always take
you to the last menu used. Any distraction may lead to an accident, with
the risk of injury. Operating the Easy Connect
Any changes made using the settings menus system while driving could distract you from
are automatically saved on closing those me- traffic.

Safety
nus.

105
Operation

Communications and multi-


media
Steering wheel controls*
General information
The steering wheel includes a multifunction
module from where it is possible to control
the audio, telephone and radio/navigation
functions without needing to distract the
driver.
There are two versions of the multifunction
module:
● Audio system + telephone without voice
control version (MID): for controlling the au-
dio functions available (radio, audio CD,
MP3, iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth sys-
tem from the steering wheel.
● Audio system + telephone with voice con-
trol version (HIGH): for controlling the audio
functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3,
iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth system
from the steering wheel.

1) Depending on the vehicle equipment.


106
Communications and multimedia

Operating the telephone and audio system without voice control (MID)

Technical data
Advice
Fig. 109 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone Navigation*

Operation
Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down
A
Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute

Short press: Answer incoming


Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the tele- call / hang up call / access call Short press: access to the tele-
B phone menu in the instrument phone menu in the instrument phone menu in the instrument list. phone menu in the instrument
panela). panela). panela). Hold down: reject incoming panela).

Emergencies
call/rediala).

Short press: switch to the previ-


C Search for last station ous song No function No function No function
Hold down: quick rewind

Short press: switch to the next


D Search for the next station song No function No function No function
Hold down: fast forward

Safety
Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument
E , F
panela) panela) panela) panela) panela)

G MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source MID: change source »

107
Operation

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone Navigation*


Turn: Access call list / select ac-
tion for incoming or current call
Turn: Changes menu or memory
(answer/reject/ignore/place on
Turn: Next/previous presetb) Turn: Next/previous songb) Turn: No function on instrument panel
H hold/mute/switch to private
Press: Acts on the MFD Press: Acts on the MFD Press: Acts on the MFD Press: Operates on instrument
mode).
panel
Press: Turn to confirm the ac-
tion.
a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.
b) Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.

Operating the telephone and audio system with voice control (HIGH)

Fig. 110 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)


Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down Turn: Turn volume up/down
A
Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute Press: Mute

Short press: Answer incoming


Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the tele- Short press: access to the tele-
call / hang up call / access call
phone menu on the dash pan- phone menu on the dash pan- phone menu on the dash pan- phone menu on the dash pan-
B list.
ela). ela). ela). ela).
Hold down: Reject incoming
Hold down: rediala) Hold down: rediala) Hold down: rediala) Hold down: rediala)
call/redial.
108
Communications and multimedia

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

Technical data
Short press: switch to the previ-
Radio/media functionality (ex-
C Search for last station ous song No function No functionb)
cept AUX )
Hold down: quick rewind

Short press: switch to the next


Radio/media functionality (ex-
D Search for the next station song No function No functionb)
cept AUX )
Hold down: fast forward

Advice
Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument
E , F
panel panel panel panel panel

G Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) Enable/disable voice controla) No functionb) Enable/disable voice control

Turn: Acts upon the dash panel Turn: Access call list / select ac- Turn: Acts upon the dash panel
Turn: Next/previous presetc) Turn: Next/previous songc) menu depending on where it is tion for incoming or current call menu depending on where it is
Press: Acts on the MFD or con- Press: Acts on the MFD or con- located (answer/reject/ignore/place on located

Operation
H firms the menu option of the firms the menu option of the Press: Acts on the MFD or con- hold/mute/switch to private Press: Acts on the MFD or con-
dash panel depending on the dash panel depending on the firms the menu option of the mode). firms the menu option of the
menu option menu option dash panel depending on the Press: Turn to confirm the ac- dash panel depending on the
menu option tion menu option
a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.

Emergencies
b) When a call is being made, radio/media functionality (except AUX).
c) Only if the dash panel is in audio menu.

Safety
109
Operation

Multimedia Connectivity Box* / Wireless Charger* The operating description is located in the re-
spective Instruction Manuals of the audio
system or the navigation system.
USB/AUX-INPort
Note
Your mobile device must support the Qi wire-
less inductive charging interface standard for
proper operation.

Fig. 112 Centre console: Connectivity Box.

Depending on the features and the country,


Fig. 111 Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input.
the vehicle may have one of these two op-
Depending on the special characteristics and tions: Connectivity Box or Wireless Charger.
the country, the vehicle may have a With the Connectivity Box you can charge
USB/AUX-IN port. your mobile device wirelessly with Qi1) tech-
The USB/AUX-IN port can be found in the nology as well as reduce the radiation in the
storage compartment area of the centre con- vehicle and have better reception.
sole ››› Fig. 111. With the Wireless Charger you only have the
The operating description is located in the re- wireless charging function of your mobile de-
spective Instruction Manuals of the audio vice with Qi technology.
system or the navigation system. The Connectivity Box/Wireless Charger can
be found in the storage compartment area of
the centre console ››› Fig. 112.

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mobile

phone wirelessly.
110
Opening and closing

Opening and closing Duplicate keys Radio frequency remote control*

Technical data
If you need a replacement key, go to a Techni-
cal Service with your vehicle identification
Keys number.
Set of keys WARNING
● An incorrect use of the keys can cause seri-
ous injuries.

Advice
● Never leave children or disabled persons in
the vehicle. In case of emergency, they may
not be able to leave the vehicle or manage on
their own.
Fig. 114 Assignment of buttons on the re-
● An uncontrolled use of the key could start
mote control key.
the engine or activate any electric equipment

Operation
(e.g. electric windows), causing risk of acci-
dent. The doors can be locked using the re-
mote control key. This could become an ob-
Fig. 113 Set of keys. stacle for assistance in an emergency situa-
tion.
The set of keys may consists of the following, ● Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. An
depending on the version of your vehicle:

Emergencies
unauthorised use of your vehicle could result
● a remote control key ››› Fig. 113 A in injury, damage or theft. Therefore always
take the key with you when you leave the ve-
● a key without remote control B , hicle.
● a plastic key tab* C . ● Never remove the key from the ignition if
the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer- Fig. 115 Vehicle key with alarm button.
or ing could suddenly block and it would be im-
possible to steer the vehicle. The radio frequency remote control key is

Safety
● two keys with remote control B
used to lock and unlock the vehicle from a
● a plastic key tab* C .
CAUTION distance.
There are electronic components in the re- By using button 4 ››› Fig. 114 on the control,
mote control key. Avoid wetting and hitting the key shaft is released.
the keys.
Unlocking the vehicle  ››› Fig. 114 1 . »
111
Operation

Locking the vehicle  ››› Fig. 114 2 . ● If the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked SEAT recommends you ask a specialised
by using the radio frequency remote control, workshop to replace the battery.
Unlocking the rear lid. Press button 
››› Fig. 114 3 until all the turn signals on the the remote control key will have to be re- The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-
synchronised. For this, go to your technical
vehicle flash briefly. When the unlocking but- cle key, under a cover.
services.
ton  3 is pressed, you have 2 minutes to
open the door. Once this time has passed, it Changing the battery
will lock again. ● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 111.
Replacing the battery
Moreover, the battery indicator on the key ● Remove the cover from the back of the ve-
››› Fig. 114 (arrow), will flash. hicle key ››› Fig. 116 in the direction of the ar-
The remote control transmitter and the bat- row ››› .
teries are integrated in the key. The receiver ● Extract the battery from the compartment
is inside the vehicle. The maximum range de- using a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 117.
pends on different factors. The range is re- ● Place the new battery in the compartment
duced as the batteries start to lose power. as shown ››› Fig. 117, pressing in the oppo-
site direction to that shown by the arrow
Alarm button* ››› .
Only press the alarm button in the event of ● Fit the cover as shown ››› Fig. 116, pressing
an emergency ››› Fig. 115 5 ! When the it onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite
alarm button is pressed, the vehicle horn is Fig. 116 Vehicle key: opening the battery
direction to that shown by the arrow until it
heard and the turn signals are switched on compartment.
clicks into place.
for a short time. When the alarm button is
pressed again, the alarm is switched off. CAUTION
● If the battery is not changed correctly, the
WARNING
vehicle key may be damaged.
Read and observe the relevant warnings ››› ● Use of unsuitable batteries may damage
in Set of keys on page 111.
the vehicle key. For this reason, always re-
place the dead battery with another of the
Note same voltage, size and specifications.
● The remote control key works only when ● When fitting the battery, check that the po-
you are in its scope. larity is correct.
Fig. 117 Vehicle key: removing the battery.

112
Opening and closing

For the sake of the environment Spare remote control keys are available at – Locking system “Safe*”

Technical data
your Technical Service, where they must be – Selective* unlocking system
Please dispose of your used batteries correct-
matched to the locking system.
ly and with respect for the environment. – Self-locking system to prevent involunta-
Up to five remote control keys can be used. ry unlocking
– Automatic speed dependent locking and
Synchronising the remote control key unlocking system*
Central locking system – Emergency unlocking system
If it is not possible to unlock or lock the door

Advice
with the remote control, it should be re-
synchronised.
Description Unlocking the vehicle*
– Press button  ››› Fig. 114 on remote
Read the additional information carefully control to unlock all the doors and rear
While the vehicle is open: ›››  page 8. lid.
– Press the  button 2 ››› Fig. 114 on the re- The central locking system enables you to
mote control.

Operation
lock and unlock all doors and the rear lid by Locking the vehicle*
– Then close the vehicle using the key blade just pushing the button. – Press button  ››› Fig. 114 on the remote
within one minute. control to lock all doors and the rear lid
Central locking can be activated by using any
of the following options: or turn the key in the door to lock all
While the vehicle is closed: doors and the rear lid.
– Press the  button 1 ››› Fig. 114 on the re- ● the key, by inserting it into the driver door

Emergencies
mote control. cylinder and rotating it in the opening direc- WARNING
tion. Depending on the vehicle version, ei-
– Then close the vehicle using the key blade ● Locking from the outside carelessly or with-
ther all doors will be unlocked or only the
within one minute. out good visibility may lead to bruising, par-
driver door will be unlocked. All doors will be ticularly in the case of children.
locked on locking the vehicle using the key.
It is possible that the vehicle could no longer ● When locking a vehicle, never leave chil-
be opened and closed with the remote con- ● the interior central lock button dren unaccompanied inside, as from the out-
trol if the button  is repeatedly pressed out- ››› page 115. side it will be difficult to provide assistance if

Safety
side of the effective range of the radio fre- ● the radio frequency remote control, using required.
quency remote control. The remote control the buttons on the key ››› page 111. ● Having the doors locked prevents intruders
key will have to be resynchronised. from getting in, for example when stopped at
Various functions are available to improve a traffic light. »
the vehicle safety:

113
Operation

Note Deactivation WARNING


For anti-theft security, only the driver door is Rotate the key inserted in the lock cylinder No one should remain inside the vehicle if the
fitted with a lock cylinder. twice towards the locking direction. “Safe” system is activated because opening
To activate the system using the remote con- the doors will not be possible in the event of
an emergency neither from the inside nor the
trol, press the lock button on the remote
outside and help from the outside is made
“Safe” security system** twice  in less than five seconds.
difficult. Danger of death. Passengers could
On deactivating the “Safe” system, the alarm become trapped inside in case of emergency.
This is an anti-theft device which consists of
volumetric sensor is also deactivated.
a double lock for the door locks and a deacti-
vation function for the boot in order to pre- With the “Safe” switched off, doors can be
vent forced entry. opened from the interior but not from the ex- Selective unlocking system*
terior.
Activation This system allows to unlock either just the
See “Selective unlocking system*” driver door or all the vehicle.
The “safe” system is activated when the vehi-
cle is locked using the key or the remote con- “Safe” status Driver door unlock button
trol.
On the driver door, there is warning lamp visi- Unlock once. Use either the key or the remote
To activate it with the key, rotate once it is in- ble from outside the vehicle through the win- control.
serted in the door lock cylinder in the locking dow which shows the “Safe” system status.
direction. Once the key is inserted in the lock cylinder,
We will know that “Safe” system is activated rotate once in the unlock direction. The driver
To activate the system using the remote con- by the flashing warning lamp. The indicator door will remain without “Safe” and un-
trol, press the lock button once  on the re- will flash on all vehicles, fitted and nor fitted locked. In vehicles fitted with an alarm, see
mote. with an alarm, until they unlock. the Anti-theft Alarm section ››› page 119.
Once this system is activated, opening doors Remember: Using the remote control, press the unlock
from the outside and the inside is not possi- button on the remote  once. The “Safe” sys-
Safe activated with or without an alarm:
ble. The rear lid can not be opened. The cen- tem for all the vehicle is deactivated, only the
warning lamp flashes continuously.
tral lock button does not work. driver door is unlocked and both the alarm
Safe deactivated without an alarm: the warn- and the warning lamp are also turned off.
When the ignition is switched off, the instru-
ing lamp stays off.
ment panel display indicates that the “Safe”
system is on. Safe deactivated with an alarm: the warning
lamp stays off.

114
Opening and closing

Unlocking all doors and the luggage com- Locking Central lock button*

Technical data
partment The doors will lock automatically if the speed
The unlock button on the remote control of 15 km/h (9 mph) is exceeded. The rear lid
must be pressed twice  so that all doors will lock automatically if the speed of 6 km/h
and the luggage compartment can be (4 mph) is exceeded.
opened.
If the vehicle is stopped and any of its doors
Press twice within 5 seconds to deactivate open, when starting again and exceeding the
the “Safe” system for all vehicle, to unlock all mentioned speed, all doors will lock again.

Advice
doors and to use the luggage compartment.
The warning lamp and the alarm (only vehi- Unlocking
cles fitted with one) are turned off.
On withdrawing the ignition key, the vehicle
will returns to its status prior to self-locking. Fig. 118 Central lock button.
Unlocking the luggage compartment
Each door can be unlocked and opened inde-
See ›››  page 9. Read the additional information carefully

Operation
pendently from the inside (for example, when
a passenger gets out). To do it, simply oper- ›››  page 8
ate the lever inside the door. The central lock button allows you to lock and
Self-locking system to prevent invol- unlock the vehicle from the inside.
untary unlocking WARNING
The central lock button also works with the
The door handles must not be operated when ignition switched off, except when the “safe”

Emergencies
It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un-
the vehicle is running: the door would open. system is activated.
intentional unlocking of the vehicle.
If the vehicle is unlocked and none of the Please note the following if you lock your ve-
Note
doors (including the boot) are opened within hicle with the central lock button:
30 seconds, it re-locks automatically. If the airbags are triggered during an acci-
dent, the vehicle is unlocked, except for the ● Locking the doors and rear lid prevents ac-
luggage compartment. It is possible to lock cess from the outside (for safety reasons, e.g.
the vehicle from inside with the central lock- when stopped at a traffic light).

Safety
Automatic speed-dependent locking ing, after turning the ignition off and back on ● The driver door cannot be locked while it is
and unlocking system* again.
open. This avoids the user from forgetting his
This is a safety system which prevents access
key inside the vehicle. »
to the vehicle from the outside when it is run-
ning (e.g. when stopped at a traffic light).
115
Operation

● All doors can be unlocked separately from Unlocking and locking the vehicle Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-
inside the vehicle. Do this by pulling the door with Keyless Access* tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle
release lever once. without actively using its key. For this, all that
is required is for a valid vehicle key to be in
WARNING an area near the vehicle ››› Fig. 119 and one
● If the vehicle is locked, children and disa- of the sensor surfaces on the door handles to
bled people may be trapped inside it. be touched ››› Fig. 120 ››› .
● Repeated operation of central locking will The vehicle can only be unlocked and locked
prevent the central lock button from working via the driver’s door. When doing so, the re-
for a few seconds. Then, it can only be un- mote control key must be no further than ap-
locked in case it has been previously locked. prox. 1.5 m from the door handle.
After few seconds, the central locking be-
comes operative again. It does not matter where you carry the key, for
● The central lock button is not operative
instance whether it is in your jacket pocket or
Fig. 119 Keyless Access locking and ignition
when the vehicle is locked from the outside in a briefcase.
system: In the proximity of the car.
(with the remote control or the key). Once the doors have been locked, they can-
not be opened again immediately. This will
Note enable you to check that the doors are prop-
erly closed.
● Vehicle locked,  button.
● Vehicle unlocked,  button. If you wish, when unlocking, you can unlock
only the driver’s door, the doors on the side
being unlocked or the entire vehicle. The nec-
essary adjustments can be performed in ve-
hicles with a driver information system
›››  page 25.
Fig. 120 Keyless Access locking and ignition General information
system: sensor surface A for unlocking in-
side the door handle and sensor surface B If a valid key is located in the proximity of the
for locking on the exterior of the handle. car ››› Fig. 119, the Keyless Access lock and
ignition system gives the key entry as soon
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle as one of the sensor surfaces on the driver’s
may have the Keyless Access system.

116
Opening and closing

door handles is touched. The following fea- Unlocking and opening the doors (Keyless- without activating the “Safe” security system

Technical data
tures are then available without having to Entry) ››› page 114.
use the vehicle key actively: ● Grip the driver door handle. In doing this,
the sensor surface ››› Fig. 120 A (arrow) is Unlocking and locking the rear lid
● Keyless-Entry: unlocking the vehicle using
the handles of the front driver’s door or the touched on the handle and the vehicle un- When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto-
softtouch/handle on the rear lid. locks. matically unlocks on opening if there is a val-
● Open the door. id vehicle key in the proximity ››› Fig. 119.
● Keyless-Exit: locking the vehicle using the
sensor of the driver door handle. Open or close the rear lid normally.
On vehicles with selective opening or info-

Advice
● Press & Drive: keyless starting of the en- tainment system configuration, pulling the After closing, the rear lid locks automatically.
gine with the starter button ››› page 158. door handle twice will unlock all doors. If the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear
lid will not lock automatically after closing it.
The central locking and locking systems oper- On vehicles without a “Safe” security sys-
ate in the same way as a normal locking and tem: shutting and locking doors (Keyless-Ex- What happens when locking the vehicle with
unlocking system. Only the controls change.

Operation
it) a second key
Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a ● Switch the ignition off. If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and
double flash of the indicator lights; locking it is locked from the outside with a second
● Close the driver's door.
by a single flash. vehicle key, the key inside the vehicle is
● Touch the lock sensor surface B (arrow) of
If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and blocked for engine ignition ››› page 155. In
the driver door handle once. The door being order to enable engine ignition, the button
the rear lid are closed leaving the last key

Emergencies
operated must be closed.
used inside the vehicle and none outside, on the key  inside the vehicle needs to be
the vehicle will not lock immediately. All the pressed.
On vehicles with a “Safe” security system:
vehicle's indicator lights will flash four times.
shutting and locking doors (Keyless-Exit)
The vehicle will lock again after a few sec- Automatically disabling sensors
onds if you fail to open any door or the rear ● Switch the ignition off.
If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a
lid. ● Close the driver's door. long period of time, the proximity sensors on
If you unlock the vehicle but fail to open any ● Touch the sensor surface B (arrow) of the the passenger doors are automatically disa-

Safety
door or the rear lid, the vehicle will lock again driver door handle once. The vehicle locks bled.
after a few seconds. with the “Safe” ››› page 114 system. The door If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-
being operated must be closed. dles is often activated in a unusual manner
● Touch the sensor surface B (arrow) of the with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches
driver door handle twice to lock the vehicle of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity »
117
Operation

sensors are disabled for a certain period of keep a finger for a few seconds on the lock- operation of the Keyless Access system. Con-
time. ing sensor surface ››› Fig. 120 B (arrow) of tact a specialised workshop. SEAT recom-
the door handle until the windows and roof mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
Sensors will again be enabled:
have closed. ● Depending on the function set on the info-
● After a time. The doors may be opened by touching the tainment system for the mirrors, the exterior
● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but- sensor surface of the door handle depending mirrors will unfold and the surround lighting
ton  on the key. on the settings that have been activated in will come on when unlocking the vehicle us-
ing the sensor surface on the driver door han-
● OR: if the rear lid is open. the Easy Connect system with the  button
dle.
and the Setup and Opening and Closing func-
● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with ● If there is no valid key inside the vehicle or
tion buttons.
the key. the system fails to detect one, a warning will
CAUTION display on the dash panel screen. This could
Keyless Access temporary disconnection happen if any other radio frequency signal in-
function The sensor surfaces on the door handles terferes with the key signal (e.g. from a mo-
could engage if hit with a water jet or high bile device accessory) or if the key is covered
The temporary disconnection of the Keyless pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle key by another object (e.g. an aluminium case).
Access system requires a sequence of ac- in the proximity. If at least one of the win- ● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a lay-
tions. First of all, the vehicle must be locked dows is open and the sensor surface B (ar-
er of salt, how the sensors on the door han-
with the key. After this, a second locking ac- row) of the handle permanently activates, all
dles operate may be affected. In this case,
tion must be performed within 5 seconds windows will close.
clean the vehicle.
through the door handle sensor.
● If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic
If the second action is carried out after more Note gearbox, it may only be locked in the gear
than 5 seconds have elapsed since the vehi- ● If the vehicle battery has little or no charge, stick is in position P.
cle was locked with the remote it will not be or the vehicle key battery is almost or entire-
possible to disconnect Keyless Access. ly out of charge, you will probably not be able
to lock or unlock the vehicle with the Keyless
Once Keyless Access has been temporarily Access system. The vehicle can be unlocked
disconnected, the vehicle can only be un- or locked manually.
locked with the key. After unlocking, the Key-
● To control the proper locking of the vehicle,
less Access feature will be reactivated.
the release function is disabled for approx. 2
seconds.
Convenience functions
● If the message Keyless access system
To close all the electric windows and the faulty is displayed on the screen of the
glass roof using the convenience function, dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the
118
Opening and closing

Childproof lock and clockwise for the right-hand side signal light located on the driver door will

Technical data
doors. flash along with the turn signals, indicating
that the alarm and the locking security sys-
Deactivating the childproof lock tem (double lock) have been turned on.
– Unlock the vehicle and open the door If any of the doors or the bonnet are open,
whose childproof lock you want to deacti- they will not be included in the protection
vate. zones of the vehicle when the alarm is con-
– With the door open, rotate the groove in
nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse-

Advice
quently closed, they will be automatically in-
the door using the ignition key, anti-clock-
cluded in the protection areas of the vehicle
wise for the right-hand side doors, and
and the turn signals will flash accordingly
clockwise for the left-hand side doors
when the doors close.
Fig. 121 Childproof lock on the left hand side
››› Fig. 121.
door. ● The turn signal light will flash twice on
Once the childproof lock is activated, the
opening and deactivating the alarm.

Operation
door can only be opened from the outside.
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors ● The turn signal light will flash once on clos-
The childproof lock can be activated or deac-
from being opened from the inside. This sys- ing and activating the alarm.
tivated by inserting the key in the groove
tem prevents minors from opening a door ac-
when the door is open, as described above.
cidentally while the vehicle is running. When does the system trigger an alarm?
This function is independent of the vehicle The system triggers an alarm, if the following

Emergencies
electronic opening and locking systems. It unauthorised actions are carried out when
only affects rear doors. It can only be activa- Anti-theft alarm*
the vehicle is locked:
ted and deactivated manually, as described
below: Description of anti-theft alarm sys- ● Mechanical opening of the vehicle with the
tem* vehicle key without switching on the ignition
Activating the childproof lock in the next 15 seconds (in certain markets,
The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to such as the Netherlands, the alarm is activa-
– Unlock the vehicle and open the door in
break into the vehicle or steal it. The system ted immediately).

Safety
which you wish to activate the childproof will initiate acoustic and optical warning sig-
lock. ● A door is opened.
nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced.
● Opening the bonnet.
– With the door open, rotate the groove in
The anti-theft alarm system is automatically
the door using the ignition key, anti-clock- switched on when locking the vehicle. The
● The rear lid is opened. »
wise for the left-hand side doors ››› Fig. 121 system is immediately activated and the turn
119
Operation

● Ignition switched on with a non-validated Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec. Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-
key. and the ignition will be blocked. tow system*
● Movements in the driving compartment
(vehicles with a volume sensor). Note Monitoring or control function incorporated
● After 28 days, the indicator light will be in the anti-theft alarm* which detects unau-
● Towing of the vehicle1).
switched off to prevent the battery from thorised vehicle entry by means of ultra-
● Vehicle tilt angle1). sound.
draining if the vehicle has been left parked
● Undue manipulation of the alarm. for a long period of time. The alarm system
● Battery handling. remains activated. Activation
● The alarm will trigger again if attempts are – It is automatically switched on when the
In this case, the acoustic signals will go off made to open another protection zone. anti-theft alarm is activated.
and the turn signal will flash for approximate- ● The alarm system can be activated or deac-
ly 30 seconds. This cycle may be repeated up tivated using the radio frequency remote con- Deactivation
to 10 times depending on the country. trol ››› page 111.
– Open the vehicle with the key, either me-
● The anti-theft alarm is not activated when
Opening all the doors in manual mode chanically or by pressing the  button on
the vehicle is locked from within using the
central locking button .
the remote control. If the vehicle is opened
In vehicles without an alarm, when opening mechanically, the time period from when
the driver door manually, all doors are ● If the vehicle battery is run down or flat
the door is opened until the key is inserted
opened. then the anti-theft alarm will not operate cor-
into the contact should not exceed 15 sec-
rectly.
onds, otherwise the alarm will be triggered.
How to switch the alarm off ● Vehicle monitoring remains active even if
the battery is disconnected or not working for – Press the button  on the remote control
To deactivate the anti-theft alarm, turn the twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sen-
any reason.
key in the opening direction, open the door sors will be deactivated. The alarm system
● The alarm is triggered immediately if one of
and switch the ignition on, or press the un- remains activated.
lock button  on the remote control. the battery cables is disconnected while the
alarm system is active.
In vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-
system, you have 15 seconds to insert the tow system are automatically switched on
key in the ignition lock and activate the igni- again next time the vehicle is locked.
tion if the vehicle is opened using the driver
door key.

1) With vehicles fitted with a tow-away protection


120
Opening and closing

The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow Note You can prevent the alarm from being trig-

Technical data
sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch- gered accidentally by switching off the vehi-
● If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm is
ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched cle interior monitoring and/or tow-away pro-
activated without the volumetric sensor func-
on. In order to activate it, all the doors and tection.
tion, relocking will activate the alarm with all
the rear lid must be closed.
its functions, except the volumetric sensor. – To switch off the vehicle interior monitoring
If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior This function is reactivated when the alarm is and tow-away protection, switch off the ig-
monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must switched on again, unless it is deliberately nition on the infotainment system: button
be done each time that the vehicle is locked; switched off.  > function button Setup > Opening and

Advice
if not, they will be automatically switched on. ● If the alarm has been triggered by the volu- closing > Central locking > Switch off alarm.
metric sensor, this will be indicated by a
The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- flashing of the warning lamp on the driver – When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicle
tow system should be switched off if animals door when the vehicle is opened. The flash is interior monitoring and the tow-away pro-
are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise, different to the flash indicating the alarm is tection are switched off until the next time
their movements will trigger the alarm) or activated. the door is opened.
when, for example, the vehicle is transported ● The vibration of a mobile phone left inside

Operation
or has to be towed with only one axle on the If the anti-theft security system (Safelock)*
the vehicle may cause the vehicle interior
ground. monitoring alarm to trigger, as both sensors
››› page 114 is switched off, the vehicle interi-
or monitoring and the tow-away protection
react to movements and shakes inside the ve-
False alarms hicle. are automatically switched off.

Interior monitoring will only operate correctly ● If on activating the alarm, any door or the
WARNING
rear lid is open, only the alarm will be activa-

Emergencies
if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob-
serve related legal requirements. ted. The vehicle interior monitoring and the Observe the safety warnings ››› in Descrip-
anti-tow system will only be activated once tion on page 113.
all the doors are closed (including the rear
The following cases may cause a false alarm:
lid).
● Open windows (partially or fully),
● Sliding sunroof open (partially or complete- Boot hatch
ly), Deactivating the vehicle interior moni-
Opening and closing

Safety
● Movement of objects inside the vehicle, toring and anti-tow systems*
such as loose papers, items hanging from
Read the additional information carefully
the rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc. When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will be
triggered if movements are detected in the
›››  page 9 »
interior (e.g. by animals) or if the vehicle's in-
clination is changed (e.g. during transport).
121
Operation

WARNING Electric windows Safety switch *


● Always close the rear lid properly. Risk of Safety switch 5 on the driver door can be
accident or injury. Opening and closing of the electric used to disable the electric window buttons
● The rear lid must not be opened when the windows* in the rear doors.
reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear
damage the tail lights. doors are activated.
● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down
Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors
with your hand on the rear window. The glass
are deactivated. The safety control symbol 
could smash. Risk of injury!
lights up in yellow if the buttons on the rear
● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it.
doors are switched off.
If not, it may open unexpectedly while driv-
ing.
WARNING
● Never allow children to play in or around
the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected Observe the safety warnings ››› in Set of
to extremely high and low temperatures, de- keys on page 111.
pending on the time of year, thus causing se- Fig. 122 Detail of the driver door: controls for ● Incorrect use of the electric windows can
rious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal the front and rear windows (5-door vehicles result in injury.
consequences. Close and lock both the rear with front and rear electric windows). ● Never close the rear lid without observing
lid and all the other doors when you are not and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could
using the vehicle. Read the additional information carefully cause serious injury to you and third parties.
● Closing the rear lid without observing and ›››  page 10 Make sure that no one is in the path of a win-
ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury dow.
The front and rear electric windows can be
to you and to third parties. Make sure that no ● If the ignition is switched on, the electric
one is in the path of the rear lid.
operated by using the controls on the driver
door. The other doors each have a switch for equipment could be activated with risk of in-
● Never drive with the rear lid open or half- jury, for example, in the electric windows.
their own window.
closed, exhaust gases may enter into the in- ● The doors can be locked using the remote
terior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning! Always close the windows fully if you park control key. This could become an obstacle
● If you only open the rear lid, do not leave the vehicle or leave it unattended ››› . for assistance in an emergency situation.
the key inside. The vehicle cannot be opened ● Therefore always take the key with you
if the key is left inside. You can use the electric windows for approx.
10 minutes after switching off the ignition if when you leave the vehicle.
neither the driver door nor the front passen- ● The electric windows will work until the ig-
ger door has been opened and the key has nition has been switched off and one of the
not been removed from the ignition. front doors has been opened.
122
Opening and closing

● If necessary, use the safety switch to disa- dow closes with maximum force. The roll- Convenience opening/closing

Technical data
ble the rear electric windows. Make sure that back function is now deactivated.
they have been disabled. Use the convenience opening/closing func-
If more than 10 seconds pass, the window tion to easily open/close all the windows and
will open fully when you operate one of the the sliding/tilting sunroof* from the outside.
Note buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.
If the window is not able to close because it Convenience open function
is stiff or because of an obstruction, the win- WARNING
dow will automatically open again – Press and hold button  on the remote con-
● Always take the ignition key with you when
trol key until all the windows and the slid-

Advice
››› page 123. If this happens, check why the leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to
window could not be closed before attempt- ing/tilting sunroof* have reached the de-
be gone for a short time. Please ensure that
ing to close it again. sired position, or
children are never left alone inside the vehi-
cle. – First unlock the vehicle using button  on
● The electric windows will work until the ig- the remote control key and then keep the
Roll-back function nition has been switched off and one of the key in the driver door lock until all the win-

Operation
front doors has been opened. dows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* have
The roll-back function reduces the risk of in- ● Closing the windows without observing and reached the required position.
jury when the electric windows close. ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury
to you and third parties. Make sure that no Convenience close function
● If a window is obstructed when closing au-
one is in the path of a window.
tomatically, the window stops at this point – Press and hold button  on the remote
● Never allow people to remain in the vehicle
and lowers immediately ››› . control key until all the windows and the

Emergencies
when you close the vehicle from the outside. sliding/tilting sunroof* are closed ››› , or
● Next, check why the window does not close The windows cannot be opened even in an
before attempting it again. emergency. – Keep the key in the driver door in the "lock"
● If you try within the following 10 seconds ● The roll-back function does not prevent fin- position until all the windows and the slid-
and the window closes again with difficulty gers or other parts of the body getting ing/tilting sunroof* are closed.
or there is an obstruction, the automatic clos- pinched against the window frame. Risk of
ing will stop working for 10 seconds. accident. Programming convenience opening in the
Easy Connect*

Safety
● If the window is still obstructed, the win-
dow will stop at this point. – Select: button  > function button Setup
● If there is no obvious reason why the win- > Opening and closing > Window op-
eration > Convenience opening, to
dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by
pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-
choose between all windows (All), only »
123
Operation

the driver’s (Driver) or none (Deactiva- One-touch opening Sunroof*


ted). – Push down the window button briefly up to
the second position. The window opens Introduction
WARNING fully.
● Take care when closing the sliding/tilting
WARNING
sunroof* and windows. There is a risk of suf- Resetting one-touch opening and closing
fering injury. If the sunroof is used negligently or without
– The automatic open and close function will paying due attention, it can cause serious in-
● For safety reasons, you should only use the
not work if the battery has been temporari- jury.
remote control open and close functions with-
ly disconnected. The function can be re- ● Open or close the sunroof and the sun blind
in about 2 metres of the vehicle. To avoid in-
stored as follows: only when no one is in their path of move-
juries, always keep an eye on the windows
and the sliding/tilting sunroof* when press- – Close the window as far as it will go by lift- ment.
ing the button to close them. The windows ing and holding the electric window switch. ● Never leave any key inside the vehicle
stop moving as soon as the button is re- when exiting.
leased. – Release the switch and then lift it again for
● Never leave a child or any other person who
1 second. This will re-enable the automatic
may need help in the vehicle, especially if
function.
they have access to the vehicle key. If using
One-touch opening and closing* If you push (or pull) a button to the first they key unattended, they could lock the ve-
hicle, start the engine, switch on the ignition
stage, the window will open (or close) until
One-touch opening and closing means you and activate the sunroof.
you release the button. If you push or lift the
do not have to hold down the button. button briefly to the second stage, the win- ● After switching off, it is still possible to
dow will open (one-touch opening) or close open or close the sunroof during a short
Buttons ››› Fig. 122 1 , 2 , 3 and 4 have space of time provided that neither the driver
two positions for opening windows and two (one-touch closing) automatically. If you op-
nor passenger door is opened.
for closing them. This makes it easier to open erate the button while the window is opening
and close windows to the desired position. or closing, it stops at this position.
CAUTION
One-touch closing ● To prevent damage, during winter tempera-
tures remove any ice or snow that might be
– Pull up the window button briefly up to the
on the car roof before opening the sunroof or
second position. The window closes fully. adjusting the tilt position.

124
Opening and closing

● Before leaving the vehicle or in case of rain- Opening and closing the sunroof Adjusting the tilt position of the sunroof

Technical data
fall, always close the sunroof. With the sun- ● Press the rear part of the button B to the
roof open or in a tilted position, water can en- first level.
ter the interior and can cause considerable
● Automatic operation: briefly press the rear
damage to the electrical system. As a result,
other damage can occur in the vehicle. part of button B to the second level.

Closing the sunroof from a tilted position


Note
● Press the front part of the button A to the

Advice
● Leaves and other loose objects that accu-
first level.
mulate on the sunroof rails should be regular-
ly cleaned away either by hand or with a vac- ● Automatic operation: briefly press the front
uum. part of the button A to the second level.
● If the sunroof does not work correctly, the Fig. 123 On the interior roof lining: sunroof
anti-trap function will not work either. Con- button. Stopping the automatic operation by adjust-

Operation
tact a specialised workshop. ing the tilted position of the sunroof or by
● Some settings can be saved in user ac-
The sunroof only works when the ignition is closing the sunroof
counts of the personalisation function switched on. Once the ignition has been
● Press button A or B again.
›››  page 25. switched off, you can still open or close the
sunroof for a few minutes provided the driver
door and the front passenger door are not Opening the sunroof
opened. ● Press button backwards to the first lev-

Emergencies
C
el.
The button  ››› Fig. 123 has two levels. The
first level switches the sunroof to the tilted ● Automatic operation to comfort position:
position, opening or closing it fully or partial- briefly press button C backwards to the sec-
ly. ond level.

On the second level, the sunroof automatical- Closing the sunroof


ly moves to the corresponding final position

Safety
after briefly pressing the button. Activating ● Press button D forwards to the first level.
the button again stops the automatic func- ● Automatic operation: briefly press button
tion. D forwards to the second level. »

125
Operation

Stopping the automatic operation during the Anti-trap function of the panoramic WARNING
opening or closing sliding sunroof Closing the sunroof without the anti-trap
● Press button C or D again. function can cause serious injuries.
The anti-trap function can reduce the risk of
● Always be careful when closing the sun-
Sun visor injury when closing the sunroof ››› . If the
roof.
sunroof encounters resistance or an obstacle
The sun visor is opened and closed manually when closing it reopens immediately. ● No person should ever remain in the way of
(independently of the sliding sunroof). the sunroof, especially when closing without
● Check why the sunroof did not close. the anti-trap function.
Convenience function to open or close the ● Try to close the roof again. ● The anti-trap function does not prevent fin-
sunroof. gers or other parts of the body from becom-
● If the sun blind cannot be closed due to an
The sunroof and the windows can be opened ing trapped against the roof frame and inju-
obstacle or some resistance it stops at the ries occurring.
and closed with the convenience function: corresponding position and then opens. For
automatic closing, a new closing attempt
Using the door lock* might take place.
● Hold the key in the door lock of the driver
● If the sunroof is still unable to close, close
door in either the locking or the unlocking
it without the anti-trap function.
position to open the roof in the tilted position
or to close it.
Closing the sunroof without the anti-trap
● Release the key to interrupt this function. function
Using the remote control ● Before approx. 5 seconds of having activa-
● Keep the locking/unlocking button pressed ted the anti-trap function, press the but-
to open/close the roof; if you stop pressing ton  ››› Fig. 123 to the second level in the
the button, the opening/closing function is direction of arrow ››› Fig. 123 D until the
stopped. sunroof closes completely.
● The sunroof closes without the anti-trap
Once all the windows and the sunroof have function intervening!
closed, all the turn signals will flash. During
● If the sunroof still cannot be closed, visit a
convenience closing, the windows and the
specialised workshop.
sunroof close at the same time.

126
Lights and visibility

Lights and visibility Switching lights on and off Automatic lighting*

Technical data
Read the additional information carefully Activation
Lights ›››  page 22 – Rotate the switch to the  position, this
The driver is personally responsible for the indication will light up.
Control lamps correct use and adjustment of the lights in all
situations. Deactivation
 It lights up
– Turn the light switch to .

Advice
Rear fog light switched on ››› page 128.
Note
● The legal requirements regarding the use of Automatic lighting
vehicle lights in each country must be ob- If automatic headlight control is switched on,
 It lights up
served. dipped beam headlights are automatically
Left or right turn signal. ● The dipped beam headlights will only work switched on by a photosensor if you drive in-
The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn signal with the ignition on. The side lights come on to a tunnel, for example.

Operation
is faulty.
automatically when the ignition is turned off.
● If the lights are left on after the key has WARNING
 It lights up been taken out of the ignition lock, an audi- ● Even if the automatic headlight control is
Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 128.
ble warning sounds while the driver door re- switched on, the dipped beam headlights will
mains open. This is a reminder to switch the not be switched on with fog. Therefore, the
lights off. dipped beam must be switched on manually.
Several warning and control lamps light up

Emergencies
for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ● The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind
ed on, signalling that the function is being you. You should use the rear fog light only
Note
verified. They will switch off after a few sec- when visibility is very poor. For this reason,
when you exceed approximately 60 km/h (38 ● For vehicles with the automatic headlight
onds.
mph), a warning will appear on the instru- system, when the key is removed from the ig-
ment panel: Turn off the fog light!. nition, the audible warning will only sound if
WARNING
● The use of the lighting described here is the light knob is in position .
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning subject to the relevant statutory require- ● The use of the lighting described here is

Safety
symbols on page 104. ments. subject to the relevant statutory require-
ments. »

127
Operation

● Do not put stickers on the windscreen in WARNING Switching on the front fog lights*
front of the sensor. This may cause disrup- ● Never drive with daytime lights if the road ● Turn the switch from position   or 
tions or faults in the automatic lighting sys- to the first stop and pull it. The symbol  in
is not well lit due to weather or lighting con-
tem. the light switch lights up.
ditions. Daytime lights do not provide
● The rain sensor switches on the dipped enough light to illuminate the road properly
beam headlights when the windscreen wipers or be seen by other road users. Switching on the rear fog light (vehicles with
have been operating continuously for a few ● On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs, front fog lights)
seconds and it switches the lights off when
when activating the daytime running light ● Turn the lights control from position  
the continuous or interval wipe is switched
the rear lights are not switched on. A vehicle or  to the second stop and pull it. A lamp
off for some minutes.
which does not have the rear lights on may
on the control and warning lamps panel
not be visible to other drivers in the dark-
lights up.
ness, in the case of heavy rain or in condi-
Daytime running lights tions of poor visibility.
Switching on the rear fog light (vehicles with
The daytime running lights consist of individ- no front fog lights)
ual lights, integrated in the front headlights. Fog lights ● Turn the light control to the end from posi-
By connecting the daytime running lights, tion   or  pull it. A lamp on the con-
these lights are switched on1) ››› . trol and warning lamps panel lights up.
The daytime running lights switch on every
time the ignition is switched on, if the switch
is in positions  or , according to the level Turn signal and main beam lever
of exterior lighting.
Read the additional information carefully
When the light switch is in position , a ›››  page 23
light sensor automatically switches dipped
beam on and off (including the control and Parking lights
instrument lighting) or the daytime running
● Switch the ignition off and remove the key
lights depending on the level of exterior
lighting. Fig. 124 Dash panel: light control. from the lock.

1) On vehicles equipped with rear LED lights, the rear

side light is switched on as well.


128
Lights and visibility

● Move the turn signal lever up or down to el. The control lamp  flashes when the turn If the Coming Home or Leaving Home func-

Technical data
turn the right or left-hand parking lights on, signals are operated, provided a trailer is cor- tion is connected, the front side and dipped
respectively. rectly attached and connected to the vehicle. lights, the tail lights and the number plate
If a turn signal bulb is defective, the control light will light up to provide assistance.
Convenience turn signals lamp flashes at double speed. If the trailer
turn signal bulbs are defective, the control Coming home function
For the convenience turn signals, move the lamp  does not light up. Change the bulb.
lever as far as possible upwards or down- The Coming Home function is activated by
● The main beam headlights can only be
wards and release the lever. The turn signal switching off the ignition. When the driver
switched on if the dipped beam headlights
will flash three times. door is opened, the Coming Home lighting

Advice
are already on. The warning lamp  then
comes on.
The convenience turn signals are activated comes on in the instrument panel.
and deactivated in the Easy Connect system ● The headlight flasher comes on for as long The Coming Home lighting switches off in the
via the  button and the Setup function as you pull the lever – even if no other lights following cases:
button ››› page 105. are switched on. The warning lamp  then
comes on in the instrument panel. ● If, 30 seconds after being connected, any

Operation
In vehicles that do not have the correspond- doors or the rear lid remain open.
● When the parking lights are switched on,
ing menu, this function can be deactivated in
the headlight and the tail light on the corre- ● If the light switch is turned to position .
a specialised workshop.
sponding side of the vehicle light up. The ● If the ignition is switched on.
parking lights will only work with the ignition
WARNING
off. If said light is on, an audible warning will
Automatic Leaving Home function
The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Risk be emitted while the driver door is open.

Emergencies
of accident! Never use the main beam head- ● If the turn signal lever is left on after the The Leaving Home function is activated when
lights or the headlight flasher if they could key has been taken out of the ignition lock, the vehicle is unlocked if:
dazzle other drivers. an acoustic signal sounds when the driver
● the light control is in position  and
door is opened. This is intended as a remind-
Note er to switch off the turn signal, unless you ● the photosensor detects “darkness”.
wish to leave the parking light on.
● If the convenience turn signals are operat- The Leaving Home lighting switches off in the
ing (three flashes) and the other convenience following cases:

Safety
turn signals are switched on, the active part
stops flashing and only flashes once in the Coming Home/Leaving Home Func- ● If the time period for the delay in switching
new part selected. tion* off the headlights has ended
● The turn signals only work when the igni- ● If the vehicle is locked again.
tion is switched on. The corresponding warn- The Leaving Home function is controlled with
ing lamp   flashes in the instrument pan- a photosensor. ● If the light switch is turned to position . »
129
Operation

● If the ignition is switched on. Headlight range control Value Vehicle load statusa)
Note 3
Driver only, luggage compartment full With
trailer and maximum drawbar load.
● To activate the Coming/Leaving home func-
tion, the rotary light switch must be in posi- a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to those shown in the
tion  and the light sensor must detect table, it is possible to select intermediary positions.
darkness.
Dynamic headlight range control
The control is not mounted in vehicles with
Fog lights with cornering function* dynamic headlight range control. The head-
light range is automatically adjusted accord-
This is an additional light source to dipped ing to the vehicle load status when they are
beam headlights to light up the road as a Fig. 125 Dash panel: headlight range control. switched on.
bend is taken.
The headlight range control is modified ac- WARNING
The cornering light operates with the lights
cording to the value of the headlight beam
switched on and when driving at less than Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean that
and the vehicle load status. This offers the
40 Km/h (25 mph). Ignition occurs by turning the headlights dazzle and distract other driv-
driver optimum visibility and the headlights ers. This could result in a serious accident.
the steering or connecting the turn signal.
do not dazzle oncoming drivers ››› .
● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load
Forward gear The headlights can only be adjusted when status so that it does not blind other drivers.
● If the steering wheel is turned to the right,
the dipped beam is switched on.
or the right-hand turn signal operated, the To reset, turn switch ››› Fig. 125:
right-hand fog light turns on. Hazard warning lights 
● If the steering wheel is turned to the left, or Value Vehicle load statusa)
Read the additional information carefully
the left-hand turn signal operated, the left-
hand fog light turns on. –
Two front occupants, luggage compart- ›››  page 23
ment empty
The hazard warning lights are used to draw
In reverse, both fog lights turn on. All seats occupied, luggage compartment the attention of other road users to your vehi-
1
empty
cle in emergencies.
Note
All seats occupied, luggage compartment If your vehicle breaks down:
When the fog lamps are on, the cornering 2 full. With trailer and minimum drawbar
function is activated and both headlights are load. 1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from
continuously on. moving traffic.
130
Lights and visibility

2. Press the button to switch on the hazard Note Interior and reading lights

Technical data
warning lights ››› .
● The battery will run down if the hazard
Read the additional information carefully
3. Switch the ignition off. warning lights are left on for a long time,
›››  page 23
even if the ignition is switched off.
4. Apply the handbrake.
● The use of the hazard warning lights de-
5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear; Luggage compartment lighting
scribed here is subject to the relevant statu-
for an automatic gearbox, move the gear tory requirements. The light is activated when the rear lid is
lever to P. open, even when the ignition and lights are
turned off. For this reason, ensure that the

Advice
6. Use the warning triangle to draw the atten-
rear lid is always closed.
tion of other road users to your vehicle.
Interior lights
7. Always take the vehicle key with you when Ambient light*
you leave the vehicle. Instrument and switch lighting The ambient lighting lights up the central
All turn signals flash simultaneously when console area and the footwell area and, de-

Operation
The lighting level of instruments, controls pending on the version, the front door panel
the hazard warning lights are switched on. and displays can be adjusted through the
The two turn signal turn signal lamps   as well.
Easy Connect system with the  button and
and the turn signal lamp in the switch  will the Setup ›››  page 25 function button. It will switch on fully when the doors are
flash at the same time. The simultaneous opened and will decrease in intensity while
hazard warning lights also work when the ig- The instrument lighting (some dials and nee- driving when the rotary light switch is in posi-
nition is switched off. dles), the centre console lighting and the tion ,  or .

Emergencies
lighting of the displays are regulated by a
WARNING photodiode incorporated in the instrument The intensity of the ambient light* can be ad-
panel. justed through the Easy Connect menu, and
● The risk of an accident increases if your ve-
the colour can be switched to red or white in
hicle breaks down. Always use the hazard The instrument lighting (needles) is switched versions with front door panel lighting (see
warning lights and a warning triangle to draw on when the ignition is on and the light is Adjusting lights > Interior light-
the attention of other road users to your sta- off. The instrument lighting is dimmed auto-
tionary vehicle. ing ›››  page 25).
matically as the daylight starts to fade. It

Safety
● Due to the high temperatures that the cata- goes out completely when ambient light is Note
lytic converter can reach, never park in an very low. This function is intended to remind
area where the catalytic converter could come the driver to switch on the dipped beam If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the in-
into contact with highly inflammable materi- headlights in good time when light condi- terior lights will be switched off after approx.
als, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. This 10 minutes, providing the ignition key has
tions become poor.
could start a fire. been removed and the courtesy light position »
131
Operation

selected. This prevents the battery from dis- Note Vanity mirror
charging. There may be a vanity mirror on the rear of
To avoid possible damage to the battery, an
automatic temporary disconnection of this the sun visor with a cover 2 .
function is possible, coming back on when
normal operating conditions are re-establish- WARNING
Visibility ed. Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility.
Heated rear window  ● Always store sun blinds and visors in their
housing when not in use.
Sun visors

Windscreen wiper and rear win-


dow wiper systems
Windscreen wipers and window wiper
blade
Read the additional information carefully
Fig. 126 Together with the air conditioning ›››  page 24
controls: heated rear window switch.
Fig. 127 Sun visor on the driver side. WARNING
The heated rear window only works when the ● Worn and dirty wiper blades reduce visibili-
engine is running. When it is switched on, a Options for adjusting driver and front pas-
senger sun visors: ty and safety levels while driving.
lamp lights up on the switch. ● In cold conditions you should not use the
● Lower the sun visor towards the wind-
After approximately 8 minutes, the heating wash/wipe system unless you have warmed
screen. the windscreen with the heating and ventila-
device of the rear window switches off auto-
matically. ● The sun visor can be pulled out of its tion system. The windscreen washer fluid
mounting and turned towards the door could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and
For the sake of the environment ››› Fig. 127
1 . obscure your view of the road.
● Swing the sun visor towards the door, lon- ● Always note the corresponding warnings
The heated rear window should be switched
gitudinally backwards. ›››  page 59.
off as soon as the glass is demisted. By sav-
ing electrical power you can also save fuel.
132
Lights and visibility

WARNING ● If you stop the vehicle with the windscreen Interior mirror with automatic anti-dazzle

Technical data
wiper in position 1 or 2, it will automatically function*
The rain sensor* may not detect enough rain
change to a lower position speed. The set The anti-dazzle function is activated every
to switch on the wipers.
speed will be resumed when the vehicle pulls time the ignition is switched on.
● If necessary, switch on the wipers manually away.
when water on the windscreen obstructs visi- When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the
● The windscreen will be wiped again after
bility. interior rear vision mirror will darken auto-
approximately five seconds once the “auto-
matic wash/wipe system” has been activa- matically according to the amount of light it
CAUTION ted, provided the vehicle is moving (drip func- receives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel-

Advice
tion). If you activate the wipers less than 3 led if reverse gear is engaged.
In icy conditions, always check that the wiper
seconds after the drip function, a new wash
blades are not frozen to the glass before us-
sequence will begin without performing the Note
ing the windscreen and window wipers for
last wipe. For the “drip” function to work
the first time. If you switch on the windscreen ● The automatic anti-dazzle function will only
again, you have to turn the ignition off and
wipers when the wiper blades are frozen to work properly if the sun blind* for the rear
then on again.
the windscreen, you could damage both the window is retracted and there are no other

Operation
wiper blades and the wiper motor. ● Do not put stickers on the windscreen in objects preventing light from reaching the in-
front of the rain sensor*. This may cause sen- terior rear vision mirror.
sor disruption or faults.
Note ● If you have to stick any type of sticker on
● Depending on the version of the model, the windscreen, do not do so in front of the
● The windscreen wipers and window wipers when you engage reverse gear and with the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-daz-
will work only when the ignition is switched headlight wiper activated, this can start a zle function from working well or even from

Emergencies
on. wipe. working at all.
● The heat output of the heated jets* is con-
trolled automatically when the ignition is
switched on, depending upon the outside
temperature. Rear view mirrors Folding in the exterior mirrors man-
● In certain versions of vehicles with alarms, ually
the windscreen wiper will only work in inter- Interior mirror
val/rain sensor mode when the ignition is on The exterior mirrors of the vehicle may be fol-

Safety
and the bonnet closed. It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see ded in. For this, press the mirror housing to-
● When the interval wipe function is on, the clearly through the rear window. wards the vehicle. »
intervals are directly proportional to the
speed. This way, the higher the vehicle speed
the shorter the intervals.

133
Operation

Note 3. Turn the knob to position R (right exterior Fold in the exterior mirrors after parking
mirror). (convenience function)*
Before washing the vehicle with an automatic
car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors to avoid 4. Swivel the rotary knob to position the ex- The Easy Connect system, the  button and
damage. terior mirror so that you have a good view the function buttons SETUP and
to the rear of the vehicle ››› . Mirrors and windscreen wipers can be used to
have the exterior mirrors fold in when the ve-
Heated exterior mirrors* hicle is parked ››› page 105.
Electric exterior mirrors*
– Press the demisting button  ››› Fig. 126 When the vehicle is locked with the remote
control, by pressing for more than approxi-
– The mirrors demist for some minutes to
mately 1 second the exterior mirrors are fol-
prevent draining the battery unnecessarily.
ded in automatically. When the vehicle is
– If necessary, press the button again to re- opened with the remote control, the exterior
peat the function. mirrors are deployed automatically.
– The exterior mirror heating is not activated
in temperatures above approximately WARNING
+20 °C (+68 °F). ● Convex or aspheric mirrors increase the
field of vision however the objects appear
Folding in the exterior mirrors electrically* smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you
Fig. 128 Exterior mirror controls. use these mirrors to estimate the distance to
– Turn the control ››› Fig. 128 to position  to
vehicles behind you when changing lane, you
Read the additional information carefully fold in the exterior mirrors. You should al-
could make a mistake. Risk of accident.
›››  page 12 ways fold in the exterior mirrors if you are
driving through an automatic car wash. ● If possible, use the rear vision mirror to es-
The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using This will help prevent damage. timate distances to vehicles behind you.
the rotary knob in the driver door. ● Make sure that you do not get your finger
Folding exterior mirrors back out to the ex- trapped between the mirror and the mirror
Basic setting of exterior mirrors tended position* base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of
injury!
1. Turn knob ››› Fig. 128 to position L (left ex- – Turn the knob to position L or R to return
terior mirror). the exterior mirrors to their original posi-
tion ››› . For the sake of the environment
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the exteri-
or mirror so that you have a good view to The exterior mirror heating should be switch-
the rear of the vehicle. ed off when it is no longer needed. Other-
wise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.
134
Seats and head restraints

Note Seats and head restraints backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater

Technical data
● If the electrical adjustment ever fails to op-
the risk of injury due to improper positioning
of the belt web!
erate, the mirrors can be adjusted by hand by Adjusting the seat and head re- ● Exercise caution when securing the seat
lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.
● In vehicles with electric exterior mirrors,
straints height into forwards/backwards position. In-
juries can be caused if the seat height is ad-
the following points should be observed: if,
Adjusting the front seats justed without due care and attention.
due to an external force (e.g. being knocked
while manoeuvring), the adjustment of the ● To move the seat forwards and backwards,
Read the additional information carefully pull upwards and not sideways on the lever,

Advice
mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have
to be fully folded electrically. Do not readjust ›››  page 11 as the force exerted on it in that direction
the rear vision mirror housing by hand, as could damage it.
this will interfere with the mirror adjuster WARNING
function.
The safe driving chapter contains important
● The fold-in function on the exterior mirrors information, tips, suggestions and warnings Adjusting the front head restraints
will not activate at speeds over 40 km/h

Operation
that you should read and observe for your
(25 mph). own safety and the safety of your passengers Read the additional information carefully
››› page 61. ›››  page 11
Adjust the head restraint ›››  page 11 so
WARNING that as far as possible the top of the head re-
● Never adjust the driver or front passenger straint is level with the top of your head.

Emergencies
seat while the vehicle is in motion. While ad- When this is not possible, try to get as close
justing your seat, you will assume an incor- as possible to this position.
rect sitting position. Risk of accidents. Adjust
the driver or front passenger seat only when WARNING
the vehicle is stationary.
● Never drive if the head restraints have been
● To reduce the risk of injury to the driver and removed. Risk of injury.
front passenger in case of a sudden braking
● After refitting the head restraint, you must
or an accident, never drive with the backrest

Safety
always adjust it properly for height to achieve
tilted towards the rear. The maximum protec-
optimal protection.
tion of the seat belt can be achieved only
when the backrests are in an upright position ● Please observe the safety warnings ››› in
and the driver and front passenger have prop- Correct adjustment of front head restraints on
erly adjusted their seat belts. The further the page 65. »
135
Operation

Note – To set the head restraint lower down, press WARNING


the 1 ››› Fig. 129 button and move it
● When fitting the head restraints again, in- ● Please observe the general notes
downwards.
sert the tubes as far as possible into the ››› page 65.
guides without pressing the button. ● Remove the rear head restraints only when
Removing the head restraint
it is necessary for the placement of a child
To remove the head restraint, the correspond- seat ››› page 78. After removing a child seat,
Adjusting the rear head restraints ing backrest must be partially folded forward. remount the head restraint immediately.
– Unlock the backrest ››› page 138. Travelling with the head restraints removed
or improperly adjusted increases the risk of
– Move the head restraint upwards until it ar- severe injuries.
rives to the top.
– Press button 1 , while simultaneously
pressing on the security hole 2 with a flat Seat functions
screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide, and
remove the head restraint.
Introduction
– Move the backrest until it engages properly
››› . WARNING

Fig. 129 Rear centre head restraint: release Inappropriate use of the seat functions can
Fitting the head restraint
point. cause severe injuries.
To mount the external head restraints, the ● Assume the proper sitting position before
When transporting people in the back seat, corresponding backrest must be partially fol- your trip and remain in it throughout. This al-
place the head restraints of the occupied ded forward. so applies to the other occupants.
seats at a minimum of the next socket up – Unlock the backrest ››› page 138. ● Always keep hands, fingers, feet and other
››› . parts of the body away from the operating ra-
– Insert the head restraint bars into the dius and the adjustment of seats.
Adjusting the head restraints guides until they perceptibly engage. It
should not be possible to remove the head
– To set the head restraint higher, grasp the restraint from the backrest.
sides with both hands and move it up-
wards, until you see it engage. – Move the backrest until it engages properly
››› .

136
Seats and head restraints

Heated seats*  Activate WARNING

Technical data
Press the button  or . Seat heating is If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can ad-
switched on fully. versely affect the operation of the seat heat-
ing, increasing the risk of burns.
Adjusting the heating output ● Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to
Press the button  or  repeatedly until the using the seat heater.
desired intensity level is reached. ● Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is
wet or damp.

Advice
Deactivating ● Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp
Press the button  or  until all warning on the seat.
lamps switch off. ● Do not spill liquid on the seat.

WARNING CAUTION

Operation
Children and people who cannot perceive ● To avoid damaging the heating elements of
Fig. 130 In the centre console: front seats pain or temperature because of medications, the seat heaters, please do not kneel on the
heating switch : version with Climatronic. paralysis or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) seat or apply sharp pressure to a single point
: version with manual air conditioning. or have a limited perception of these, may on the seat cushion or backrest.
suffer burns to the back, buttocks or legs
● Liquids, sharps objects and insulating ma-
The seat cushions can be heated electrically when using seat heating, an occurrence that
may entail a very lengthy recovery period or terials (e.g. covers or child seats) can damage

Emergencies
when the ignition is switched on. The back- the seat heating.
from which it may not be possible to recover
rest is also heated in some versions.
fully. Seek medical advice if you have doubts ● In the event of smells, switch off the seat
The seat heating should not be engaged in regarding your health. heating immediately and have it inspected by
any of the following conditions: ● People with limited pain and temperature a specialised workshop.
thresholds must never use seat heating.
● The seat is unoccupied.
● If an abnormality in the device's tempera- For the sake of the environment
● The seat has a covering. ture control is detected, have it checked by a The seat heating should remain on only when

Safety
● There is a child seat installed in the seat. specialist workshop. needed. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel
● The seat cushion is wet or damp. waste.
● The indoor or outdoor temperature is great-
er than 25 °C (77 °F).

137
Operation

Folding down the back seat – Lift the cushion 2 forwards in the direc- WARNING
tion of the arrow.
● Please be careful when folding back the
– Push the unlock button ››› Fig. 132 1 for- backrest! Injuries can be caused if the seat
wards and at the same time lift the back- height is adjusted without due care and at-
rest. The rear seat backrest is not engaged tention.
when the red marking of the button 2 is ● Do no trap or damage seat belts when rais-
visible. ing the backrest.
– Insert the head restraints in the spaces on ● After raising the backrest, check it has en-
the rear of the seat cushion which are visi- gaged properly in position. Do this by pulling
ble when the seat cushion is lowered. on the central seat belt or directly on the
backrest and check that the position lever is
in the neutral position.
Fig. 131 Folding up the rear seat cushion.
Folding seat forward
● The three point automatic seat belt only
– Remove the head restraints from the works correctly when the backrest of the cen-
spaces in the seat cushion. tral seat is correctly engaged.
– Lift the backrest, and before securing it, re-
place the head restraints in the seat cush-
ion, and then click the seat correctly onto
the locking rails. The red marking on button
2 should no longer be visible when the
backrest is properly secured.
– Lower the cushion and push it backwards
below the seat belt buckles.
Fig. 132 On the rear seat backrest: release – Press the front part of the cushion down-
catch 1 ; red mark 2 . wards.

Folding seat down On split rear seats*, the backrest and cush-
– Remove the head restraint ››› page 135. ion can be lowered and raised respectively in
two sections.
– Pull the front edge of the seat cushion
››› Fig. 131 1 upwards in the direction of
the arrow.

138
Transport and practical equipment

Transport and practical WARNING Note

Technical data
equipment Always keep the storage compartment cover
closed while the vehicle is in motion in order
The storage drawer will hold a maximum
weight of 1.5 kg.
to reduce the risk of injury caused by a sud-
Practical equipment den braking or by an accident.
Storage pocket in the seat*
Glove compartment
Storage compartment under the front

Advice
seats*

Operation
Fig. 135 Storage pocket.
Fig. 133 Passenger side: glove compartment.
There is a storage pocket on the rear of the

Emergencies
The compartment can be opened by pulling Fig. 134 Storage compartment under the front seats.
the lever ››› Fig. 133. right front passenger seat.
This compartment can hold documents in A4
format, a water bottle of 1.5 L, etc. To open Storage compartment in front door
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CD – The compartment is opened by pulling on panel*
player is located in the glove compartment. the lever and assisting it with your hand.
Separate operating instructions are enclosed In this storage compartment a 1.5l water bot-

Safety
for this equipment in the corresponding In- To close tle, etc. can be stored.
struction Manual. – Press the cover inwards until the closed
drawer “clicks” into position.

139
Operation

Front drink holder* Electrical power socket Note


● The use of electrical appliances with the
engine switched off will cause a battery dis-
charge.
● Before using any electrical accessories, see
the instructions in ››› page 220.

Cigarette lighter*

Fig. 136 Front drink holders in the centre con- Fig. 137 Front power socket.
sole.
The 12 Volt cigarette lighter power socket can
In the central console, next to the gear lever, also be used for other electrical components
there are two drinks holders ››› Fig. 136. with a power rating of up to 120 Watt. When
the engine is switched off, however, the vehi-
WARNING cle battery will discharge. For further informa-
● Do not put hot drinks in the drink holders. tion see ››› page 220.
During sudden or normal driving manoeuvres,
when braking suddenly or in case of an acci- WARNING Fig. 138 Lighter.
dent, the hot drink could spill. Risk of scald- The power sockets and the connected acces-
ing. – Press on the cigarette lighter ››› Fig. 138 to
sories will only operate when the ignition is
● Never use rigid materials (for example, on or when the engine is running. Improper activate it ››› .
glass or ceramic), since they could cause in- use of the sockets or electrical accessories – Wait for the lighter to spring out.
jury in the case of an accident. can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire. To
avoid the risk of injury, never leave children – Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the
● When travelling, the drinks holder should
always be closed to prevent risk in the event alone inside the vehicle. cigarette on the glowing coil.
of sudden breaking or accident.
WARNING
CAUTION
● Improper use of the cigarette lighter can
Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid
lead to serious injuries or start a fire.
damaging the sockets.
140
Transport and practical equipment

● Using the lighter carefully. Carelessness or – Distribute the load evenly in the luggage ● Never exceed the allowed axle weights or

Technical data
negligence when using the cigarette lighter compartment. allowed maximum weight. If said weights are
can cause burns and serious injuries. – Place heavy objects as far forward as possi- exceeded, the driving characteristics of the
● The lighter only works when the ignition is vehicle may change, leading to accidents, in-
ble in the luggage compartment
juries and damage to the vehicle.
turned on or the engine is running. To avoid ››› Fig. 139.
the risk of fire, never leave children alone in- ● Please note that the centre of gravity may
side the vehicle. – Place the heavy objects first. shift when transporting heavy objects; this
– Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-
cident. Therefore, it is essential to adjust
rings* ››› page 143.

Advice
your speed and driving style accordingly, to
Luggage compartment – Secure loose loads with a luggage net* or avoid accidents.
with non-elastic straps secured to the fas- ● Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe-
Loading the luggage compartment tening rings*. cially when the rear lid is open. Children
could climb into the luggage compartment,
WARNING closing the door behind them; they will be

Operation
trapped and run the risk of death.
● Loose luggage and other objects in the lug-
gage compartment could cause serious inju- ● Never allow children to play in or around
ries. the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors and
rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Before
● Always stow objects in the luggage com-
you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are
partment and secure them with the fastening
no adults or children in the vehicle.
rings*.

Emergencies
● Please observe the notes on the ››› page 61.
● During sudden manoeuvres or accidents,
loose objects can be thrown forward, injuring
vehicle occupants or even third parties. This CAUTION
Fig. 139 Position heavy items as far forward increased risk of injury will be further in-
Hard objects on the rear shelf could chafe
as possible. creased if a loose object is struck by an inflat-
against the wires of the heating element in
ing airbag. If this happens, objects may
the heated rear window and cause damage.
All luggage and other loose objects must be shoot outward like a missile. Risk of fatal in-
jury.

Safety
safely secured in the luggage compartment.
● Always keep all objects in the luggage com- Note
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth
could affect safety or driving characteristics partment and use appropriate grips to secure ● The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord-
of the vehicle by shifting the centre of gravity. them, particularly in the case of heavy ob- ing to the load. When necessary check the
jects. tyre pressures on the label located on the in-
side fuel tank flap ››› page 244. »
141
Operation

● Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce WARNING


fogging of the windows. Used air escapes
Do not place heavy or hard objects on the
through ventilation slits in the side trim of
rear shelf, because they will endanger the ve-
the luggage compartment. Ensure that the
hicle occupants in case of sudden braking.
ventilation slots are never covered.
● Straps for securing the load to the fasten-
ing rings* are commercially available from ac- CAUTION
cessory shops. ● Before closing the rear lid, ensure that the
rear shelf is correctly fitted.
● An overloaded luggage compartment could
Rear shelf Fig. 141 In the luggage compartment: remov- mean that the rear shelf is not correctly seat-
ing and installing the rear shelf. ed and it may be bent or damaged.
● If the luggage compartment is overloaded,
Removing remove the tray.
● Unhook the loops ››› Fig. 140 B from their
hooks A . Note
● Remove the shelf from the side supports ● Ensure that, when placing items of clothing
››› Fig. 141 pulling it up and out. on the luggage compartment cover, rear visi-
bility is not reduced.
If necessary, the shelf can be stored under
the luggage compartment double floor
››› page 142.
Fig. 140 In the luggage compartment: remov-
Luggage compartment variable floor
ing and installing the rear shelf. Fitting
Variable floor in the tilted position
● Insert the rear shelf horizontally so that it
When the variable floor is tilted you can ac-
coincides with the “plate” on the axis of the
cess the spare wheel/anti-puncture kit area.
supports ››› Fig. 141 and press down until it
clicks into place. ● Lift the variable floor using the handle, pull
● Attach the fastening loops ››› Fig. 140 B to it back and push the backrest of the rear seat
the rear lid. until the movable part of the floor is resting
on it.
● Rest the floor on its housings.

142
Transport and practical equipment

Fastening rings* if a loose object is struck by an inflating air- WARNING

Technical data
bag.
When heavy or bulky loads are transported
on the roof carrier system, car driving per-
WARNING
formance is affected, as the centre of gravity
● If pieces of baggage or other objects are se- shifts and there is greater wind resistance.
cured to the fastening rings with inappropri- ● Always secure the load properly using belts
ate or damaged retaining cords, injuries or retaining straps that are suitable and in a
could result in the event of braking manoeu- good condition.
vres or accidents.

Advice
● Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a neg-
● Never secure a child seat on the fastening
ative effect on aerodynamics, the centre of
rings. gravity and driving performance.
● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
Fig. 142 Location of fastening rings in lug-
● Adapt your speed and driving style at all
gage compartment.
Roof carrier* times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf-

Operation
There may be four fastening rings included in fic conditions.
the luggage compartment for fastening lug- Introduction
gage and other objects ››› Fig. 142 (arrows). CAUTION
The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-
– Always use suitable and undamaged straps ● Remove the cross bars and the roof carrier
mise aerodynamics. For this reason, cross
to secure luggage and other objects to the system before entering a car wash.
bars or conventional roof carrier systems can-

Emergencies
fastening rings ››› in Loading the lug- not be secured to the roof water drains. ● Vehicle height is increased by the installa-
gage compartment on page 141. tion of cross bars or a roof carrier system and
As the roof water drains are integrated in the the load secured on them. For this purpose,
Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap- check that your vehicle's height does not sur-
unsecured in the vehicle. During a frontal col- proved cross bars and roof carrier systems pass the headspace limit, for example, for un-
lision at a speed of 50 km/h (31 mph), this can be used. derpasses or for entering garage doors.
object generates a force corresponding to 20 ● Cross bars, a roof carrier system and the
times its weight. That means that the effec- Cases in which cross bars and the roof carri- load secured on them should not interfere

Safety
tive weight of the object increases to approxi- er system should be disassembled. with the roof aerial or hamper the path of the
mately 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of panoramic sun roof ››› page 124 and the rear
● When they are not used.
the injuries which might be sustained if this lid.
“object” strikes an occupant as it flies ● When the vehicle is washed in a car wash. ● On opening the rear lid make sure that it
through the interior of the vehicle. This in- ● When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi- does not knock into the roof load. »
creased risk of injury will be further increased mum height, for example, in some garages.
143
Operation

For the sake of the environment The front and rear attachment points 1 and Loading the roof carrier system
2 are only visible when the doors are open
When cross bars and a roof carrier system are
››› Fig. 143. The load can only be secured if the crossbars
installed, the increased air resistance means
and the roof carrier system are properly in-
that the vehicle uses more fuel.
WARNING stalled ››› .
Incorrect attachment and use of the cross-
bars and the roof carrier system may cause Maximum authorised roof load
Attach the cross bars and the roof car- the whole system to detach from the roof and The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg.
rier system cause an accident and injuries. This figure comes from the combined weight
● Always take the manufacturer assembly in- of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the load
structions into account. itself on the roof ››› .
● Use only crossbars and the roof carrier sys-
Always check the weight of the roof carrier
tem when they are in perfect condition and
system, the cross bars and the weight of the
are properly secured.
load to be transported and weigh them if
● Secure the crossbars and the roof carrier
necessary. Never exceed the maximum au-
system properly. thorised roof load.
● Check threaded joints and attachments
travelling and if necessary tighten them after If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier
you have travelled a short distance. When with a lower weight rating, you will not be
making long trips, check the threaded joints able to carry the maximum authorised roof
Fig. 143 Attachment points for the roof rail- whenever you stop for a rest. load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi-
ings for the roof carrier system. ● Always fit the special roof carrier systems mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is
correctly for wheels, skis and surfboards, etc. listed in the fitting instructions.
The crossbars are the basis of a series of spe-
● Do not modify or repair the crossbars or
cial roof carrier systems. For safety reasons, Distributing a load
roof carrier system.
special fixtures must be used to safely trans-
port luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards or Distribute loads uniformly and secure them
boats on the roof. Suitable accessories can Note correctly ››› .
be acquired at SEAT dealerships. Always read the assembly instructions that
Always secure the crossbars and the roof car- come with the crossbars and the roof carrier
rier system properly. Always take the assem- system carefully and keep them in the vehi-
bly instructions that come with the crossbars cle.
and the roof carrier system in question into
account.
144
Air conditioning

Check attachments
Air conditioning so as to maintain good visibility of everything

Technical data
Once the cross bars and roof carrier system outside.
have been installed, check the bolted con- ● The maximum heat output required to de-
nections and attachments after a short jour-
Heating, ventilation and cool- frost windows as quickly as possible is only
ney and subsequently with a certain ing available when the engine has reached its
frequency. normal running temperature. Only drive when
General notes you have good visibility.
WARNING ● Always ensure that you use the heating
Read the additional information carefully system, fresh air system, air conditioner and

Advice
Exceeding the maximum authorised roof load
can result in accidents and considerable vehi- ›››  page 39 the heated rear window to maintain good visi-
bility to the outside.
cle damage.
● Never exceed the maximum authorised Pollution filter ● Never leave the air recirculation on for a
long period of time. If the cooling system is
load on the roof and on the axles or the vehi- The pollution filter (a combined particulate
switched off and air recirculation mode
cle's maximum authorised weight. filter and active carbon filter) serves as a bar- switched on, the windows can mist over very

Operation
● Never exceed the load capacity of the cross rier against impurities in the outside air, in- quickly, considerably limiting visibility.
bars and the roof carrier system, even if the cluding dust and pollen.
● Switch air recirculation mode off when it is
maximum authorised roof load has not been
For the climate control system to work with not required.
reached.
maximum efficiency, the pollution filter must
● Secure heavy items as far forward as possi-
be replaced at the specified intervals in the WARNING
ble and distribute the vehicle load uniformly.
Maintenance Programme.

Emergencies
Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and re-
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due duce driver concentration possibly resulting
WARNING
to use in areas reaching very high pollution in a serious accident.
If the load is loose or not secured, it could fall levels, the pollen filter must be changed ● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or
from the roof carrier system or cause acci- more frequently than stated in the Service use the air recirculation for long periods of
dents and injuries. Schedule. time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be
● Always use belts or retaining straps that refreshed.
are suitable and in a good condition. WARNING

Safety
● Secure the load properly. Reduced visibility through the windows in- CAUTION
creases the risk of serious accidents.
● If you suspect that the air conditioner is
● Always ensure that all windows are free of
damaged, switch it off with the A/C button to »
ice and snow, and that they are not fogged,

145
Operation

prevent further damage and have it checked pose. Therefore, you should avoid obstruct- ● To ensure correct operation, the grilles on
by a specialised workshop. ing these slots with any kind of object. both sides of the screen must not be obstruc-
● Repairs to the air conditioner require spe- ● The air conditioner operates most effective- ted.
cialist knowledge and special tools. There- ly with the windows and the sliding/tilting ● When the engine is under extreme strain,
fore, we recommend you to take the vehicle sunroof* closed. However, if the temperature switch off the compressor for a moment.
to a specialised workshop. inside the vehicle is excessive because of the
sun, the air inside can be cooled faster by
opening the windows for a short time.
Note Economic use of the air conditioning
● Do not smoke while air recirculation mode
● If the humidity and temperature outside the
is on, as smoke drawn into the air condition- When the air conditioning is switched on, the
vehicle are high, condensation can drip off ing system leaves residue on the evaporator,
the evaporator in the cooling system and compressor consumes engine power and has
producing a permanent unpleasant odour.
form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is influence on fuel consumption. Consider the
● At low outside temperatures, the compres- following points in order to have the system
normal and does not indicate a leak.
sor switches off automatically and cannot be operating in the minimum possible time.
● Keep the air intake slots in front of the
switched on even with the AUTO button.
windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to en- ● If the vehicle interior has overheated due to
● It is advisable to turn on the air condition-
sure heating and cooling are not impaired,
and to prevent the windows from misting ing at least once a month, to lubricate the an excessive solar radiation, it is best to
over. system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de- open the windows or doors to allow the hot
crease in the cooling capacity is detected, a air to escape.
● The air from the vents flows through the ve-
Technical Service should be consulted to ● While in motion, the air conditioning
hicle interior and is extracted by slots in the check the system.
luggage compartment designed for this pur- should not be switched on if the windows or
the sunroof* are open.

146
Air conditioning

Air outlets

Technical data
Advice
Operation
Fig. 144 Air vents.

To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti- Air recirculation  ● Press button , the switch's lamp will
lation in the vehicle interior, the air vents light up, indicating that air recirculation in-
››› Fig. 144 1 should remain open. Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells, side the vehicle has been activate.
e.g. when passing through a tunnel or in
● The outlets can be closed or opened sepa- queuing traffic, from entering the interior. Disconnecting the recirculation

Emergencies
rately and the air flow directed according to
need. If the air distribution is in the thaw position, In any air distribution position except thaw:
the recirculation flap will always be open
There are other additional, non-adjustable air ● Press button  again and the button's
(button light off).
vents in the dash panel 2 , in the footwell lamp will go off, indicating that air recircula-
If the air distribution is switched from any po- tion from the outside has been activated.
and in the rear area of the interior.
sition to the thaw position, recirculation will
be automatically deactivated. In the thaw position , the entry of air into
Note

Safety
the vehicle interior is always from the out-
Food, medicine and other heat or cold sensi- Connecting the recirculation side. »
tive objects should never be placed in front of
the air outlets as they may be damaged or In any air distribution position except thaw:
made unsuitable for use by the air coming
from the air vents.

147
Operation

WARNING Note button is on, the “Air recirculation” function


is automatically activated in order to cool the
In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the ● When engaging reverse gear, the air recir-
vehicle rapidly using less energy and its func-
outside enters the vehicle interior. If the air culation is connected automatically to pre-
tion control lamp will light up.
conditioner is switched off, the windows can vent the entrance of exhaust gases in the ve-
quickly mist over. Therefore, never leave the hicle on travelling backwards. The control ● If the function is not deactivated by press-
air recirculation mode switched on for a long lamp on the button  does not light up. ing the button, it will deactivate after approx-
time (risk of accident). ● If the temperature control is turned to the
imately 20 minutes.
coldest setting (blue point) and the switch 

Heating and fresh air


Controls

Fig. 145 Heating controls on the dash panel.

1 Temperature selector ››› page 149. always be set at the lowest speed when  Air recirculation button ››› page 147.
2 Blower control. There are four speed set- driving slowly. When the function is activated, a warning
tings for the blower. The blower should 3 Air distribution control. light on the button is turned on.
 Heated rear window.
148
Air conditioning

Air distribution Functions Defrosting the windscreen

Technical data
Control 3 for setting the flow of air in the re- ● Turn the temperature selector
quired direction. Ventilating the vehicle interior ››› Fig. 145
1 clockwise to reach the maxi-
The desired temperature inside the vehicle mum temperature.
 – Air distribution towards the windscreen
cannot be lower than the ambient tempera- ● Turn the blower switch 2 to setting 4.
in order to demist. For safety reasons, it is
ture.
not recommended to switch air recirculation ● Turn air distribution control to .
on. ● Turn the temperature selector ● Close the central outlets.
 – Air distribution to upper body. ››› Fig. 145 1 anti-clockwise.

Advice
● Open and turn the side outlets towards the
● Turn blower switch 2 to any of the head side windows.
 – Air distribution to footwell
settings 1-4.
 – Air distribution to the windscreen and ● Set the airflow to the desired direction us- Keeping the windscreen and the side win-
the footwell. ing air distribution control 3 . dows demisted
WARNING ● Open the relevant air outlets. ● Turn the temperature selector

Operation
››› Fig. 145 1 to the heating zone.
● For your safety, the windows should never
Interior heating ● Turn blower switch 2 to any of the head
be fogged up or covered with snow or ice.
This is essential to ensure good visibility. Maximum heat output, which is needed to settings 2-3.
Please familiarise yourself with the correct defrost the windows quickly, is only available ● Turn air distribution control to .
operation of the heating and ventilation sys- when the engine has reached its operating
● Close the central outlets.
tem, including the demist/defrost functions

Emergencies
temperature.
for the windows. ● Open and turn the side outlets towards the
● Turn the temperature selector side windows.
Note
››› Fig. 145 clockwise to select the re-
1
quired temperature. Once the windows are demisted, and as a
● Please consider the general notes preventive measure, the control 3 can be
● Turn blower switch 2 to any of the head
››› page 145. set in position , thus obtaining greater
settings 1-4.
comfort while preventing the windows from
● Set the airflow to the desired direction us- misting again.

Safety
ing air distribution control 3 .
● Open the relevant air outlets. Note
Remember that the temperature of the engine
coolant should be optimum to ensure that the »
149
Operation

heating system functions correctly (except in


vehicles fitted with additional heating*).

Manual air conditioning*


Controls

Fig. 146 Air conditioning controls on the dash


panel.

1 Temperature selector ››› page 151  Heated rear window. miliarise yourself with the correct operation
2 Blower control. There are four speed set-  Air conditioning activation button of the heating and ventilation system, includ-
tings for the blower. At low speed, it is ››› page 151. The air conditioning system ing the demist/defrost functions for the win-
recommended to set the blower to a mini- only works when the engine is running dows.
mum of 1 to improve the intake of fresh and the fan is switched on.
air. Note
3 Air distribution control. WARNING
Please consider the general notes.
 Air recirculation button ››› page 147. For your safety, the windows should never be
When the function is activated, a warning fogged up or covered with snow or ice. This is
essential to ensure good visibility. Please fa-
light on the button is turned on.
150
Air conditioning

Functions This way, if the outside humidity is extreme, ● Rotate the temperature control to the de-

Technical data
the air conditioning prevents the misting of sired level of comfort.
Interior heating the windows and therefore, comfort is im- ● Close the central outlets.
Maximum heat output, which is needed to proved.
● Open and turn the side outlets towards the
defrost the windows quickly, is only available ● Turn on the cooling system using the but- side windows.
when the engine has reached its operating ton  (the button light turns on).
temperature. If the air conditioning does not work, this
● Turn the temperature control switch until may be due to the following reasons:
● Disconnect the cooling system using but- the desired interior temperature is reached.

Advice
ton  ››› Fig. 146 (the button light turns off). ● Turn the blower switch to any of the set- ● The engine is stationary.
● Turn the temperature selector 1 to set the tings 1-4. ● The fan blower is switched off.
desired temperature inside the vehicle. ● Set the air distribution control to the air ● The outside temperature is lower than ap-
● Turn the blower switch to any of the set- flow configuration desired:  (towards the proximately +3 °C (+37 °F).
tings 1-4. windscreen),  (towards the chest),  (to- ● The air conditioning system compressor

Operation
● Set the air distribution control 3 to the air wards the footwell) and  (towards the wind- has been temporarily switched off because of
flow configuration desired:  (towards the screen and footwell areas). an increased engine coolant temperature.
windscreen),  (towards the chest),  (to- ● The air conditioner fuse is faulty.
wards the footwell) and  (towards the wind- Demist the windscreen.
● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air
screen and footwell areas). ● Turn air distribution to .
conditioning checked by a specialised work-

Emergencies
● Turn the fan control to one of the two levels shop.
Interior cooling depending on the speed required.
When the air conditioning is switched on, the
temperature and the air humidity go down.

Safety
151
Operation

Climatronic*
General notes

Fig. 147 Climatronic: controls.

Read the additional information carefully Climatronic description Switching off the Climatronic
›››  page 39 Cooling only works if the following conditions ● Set fan power to zero ››› Fig. 147 2 or
Climatronic automatically maintains a com- are met: press button .
fortable temperature. To do so, it automati- ● The engine is running
cally regulates the supplied air temperature In order to ensure engines subject to heavy
● the outside temperature is above +2 °C loads are cooled, the air conditioning com-
and the blower and air distribution levels.
(+36 °F); pressor is switched off in the event of high
The system also allows for the effect of sun-
light, so there is no need for manual adjust- ●  ignition. coolant temperatures.
ment.
Starting the Climatronic Recommended setting for all seasons of the
Automatic operations guarantee maximum year
comfort any time of year ››› page 153. The corresponding function will be switched
on when a button is pressed, turning on the ● Set the required temperature. We recom-
air conditioning if it was switched off, with mend +22 °C (72 °F).
the exception of the recirculation button. ● Press the button  ››› Fig. 147.

152
Air conditioning

● Adjust the vents so that the air flow is di- this range the temperature is regulated auto- The temperature is regulated automatically.

Technical data
rected slightly upwards. matically. If a temperature below +16 °C The air output is increased from vents
(+64 °F) is selected, “LO” is displayed on the ››› Fig. 144 2 .
Change between degrees Centigrade and de- screen. If a temperature above +29 °C
grees Fahrenheit (+84 °F) is selected, “HI” is displayed on the WARNING
screen. At both extremes, Climatronic works Read and observe the safety warnings ››› in
Keep the  and  buttons held down for 2
at maximum cooling or heating power, re- General notes on page 145.
seconds at the same time. The data is dis-
spectively. The temperature is not regulated.
played on the screen in the units required.

Advice
In the event of prolonged, irregular distribu- Note
Automatic mode tion of the air flow from the outlets (particu-
● A visit to the specialised service once a
Automatic mode is used to maintain a con- larly the footwells) and significant differen-
year is recommended to clean the Climatronic
stant temperature and demist the windows ces in temperature, e.g. on leaving the vehi- system.
inside the vehicle. cle, sensitive people may catch cold.
● The interior temperature sensor is at the
bottom. Do not cover it with stickers or the

Operation
● Set the interior temperature between Adjusting the blower like, as this could have a negative effect on
+16 °C (+64 °F) and +29 °C (+84 °F). Climatronic automatically regulates blower Climatronic operations.
● Adjust the vents so that the air flow is di- speed according to the interior temperature.
rected slightly upwards. It is possible, however, to set the blower
● Press the  button, AUTO is displayed on speed to suit requirements.
the screen.

Emergencies
● Press buttons 2 to increase or reduce
Automatic mode is switched off by pressing blower speed.
the air distribution buttons or increasing or
Climatronic will switch off when the blower
decreasing the blower speed. However, the
switches off.
temperature remains regulated.
Connecting windscreen defrost
Adjusting the temperature
● Press the button  ››› Fig. 147.

Safety
● When you switch on the ignition, control 1
››› Fig. 147 can be used to set the required in-
Switching off windscreen defrosting
terior temperature.
● Press button  several times or press
It is possible to select interior temperatures button .
from +16 °C (+64 °F) to +29 °C (+84 °F). In
153
Operation

Driving could be engaged and vehicle steering would  It lights up yellow


not work.
The 12-volt battery Take the vehicle for a short run
Address was disconnected at 15-20 km/h (9-12 mph).
Note and has been recon-
nected.
Introduction The ignition of the vehicle being towed must
be switched on to prevent the steering wheel
The power steering is not hydraulic but elec- from locking and also to allow the use of the  It flashes yellow
tromechanical. The advantage of this steer- turn signals, horn, windscreen wipers and
washers. The steering column Turn the wheel a little to both
ing is that it foes not need flexible hydraulic is tight. sides.
pipes, hydraulic oil, pump, filter or other
parts. The electromechanical system saves The steering column Remove the key from the ignition
fuel. Whereas a hydraulic system needs con- does not unlock or and switch the ignition back on.
Control lamp lock. If necessary, check the messag-
tinuous oil pressure, electromechanical
es displayed on the instrument
steering only needs power when it is used. The control lamp should light up for a few panel display.
seconds when the ignition is switched on. It Do not drive on if the steering
In vehicles with electromechanical steering,
should go out once the engine is started. column remains locked after the
the assisted steering function automatically ignition has been switched on.
adjusts according to vehicle speed, steering Seek specialist assistance.
wheel torque and wheel orientation. The  It lights up red
power steering only works when the engine The electromechani- Have the steering checked im- WARNING
is running. cal steering is dam- mediately by a specialised work-
aged. shop. If the warning lamps and the corresponding
WARNING messages are ignored when they light up, the
vehicle may stall in traffic and cause acci-
If the power steering does not work, you will  It lights up yellow
dents and severe injuries.
need much more strength to turn the wheel.
Electromechanical See a specialised workshop im- ● Never ignore the warning lamps or messag-
This has a considerable effect on vehicle
steering operation mediately and have the steering es.
safety. is limited. checked.
● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity
● The power steering only works when the If the yellow warning lamp does
not light up again after the en- and in a safe place.
engine is running.
gine is restarted and the vehicle
● Never allow the vehicle to move when the
has travelled a short distance,
engine is switched off. you do not need to take it to a
● Never remove the key from the ignition specialised workshop.
while the vehicle is moving. The steering lock
154
Driving

Note Electromechanical steering Starting and stopping the en-

Technical data
Failure to heed the control lamps and corre- In vehicles with electromechanical steering, gine
sponding text messages when they light up the assisted steering function automatically
may result in damage to the vehicle. adjusts according to vehicle speed, steering
wheel torque and wheel orientation. The
Ignition key positions
power steering only works when the engine
is running.
Information relating to different vehi-
cle processes. You should take into account that you will

Advice
need considerably more power than normal
In order to make the vehicle more difficult to to steer the vehicle if the power steering is
steal, you should always lock the steering be- not working correctly or at all.
fore leaving the vehicle.
Power-assisted steering
Mechanical steering lock Power-assisted steering helps the driver in

Operation
The steering column is locked when the key critical situations. In counter-steering, it as-
is removed from the ignition lock and the ve- sists by applying additional torque ››› . Fig. 148 Ignition key positions.
hicle is stationary.
WARNING Read the additional information carefully
Activating the steering lock ›››  page 22
Power-assisted steering, together with the

Emergencies
● Park the vehicle ››› page 161. ESC, helps the driver to control vehicle steer-
ing in critical situations. However, the driver Ignition switched off, steering lock 1
● Remove the ignition key.
is ultimately responsible for steering the ve- In this position ››› Fig. 148, the ignition and
● Turn the steering wheel slightly until the hicle at all times. Power-assisted steering the engine are OFF and the steering may be
steering lock has engaged. does not remove this responsibility. locked.

Deactivating the steering lock For the Steering lock to operate without the
ignition key, turn the steering wheel until it
● Turn the steering wheel slightly to release

Safety
locks with an audible sound. You should al-
the lock. ways lock the steering wheel when you leave
● Insert the key in the ignition lock. your vehicle. This will help prevent vehicle
● Hold the steering wheel in this position theft ››› . »
and switch on the ignition.

155
Operation

Switching the ignition or the glow plug sys- ● Unsupervised use of the key could start the Note
tem on 2 engine or any electrical system, such as the
A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensured
Turn the ignition key to this position and re- electric windows. This could result in serious
if genuine SEAT keys are used.
lease it. If the key cannot be turned or it is injury.
difficult to turn from position 1 to position
2 , move the steering wheel from one side to CAUTION
the other; this will release it.
Starting petrol engines
The starter motor will only work when the en-
gine is stopped (ignition key position 3 ). The engine can only be started using a genu-
Starting 3
ine SEAT key with its correct code.
The engine is started when the key is in this
– Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi-
position. Electrical devices with high power Electronic immobiliser “SAFE” tion and depress the clutch pedal thor-
consumption are switched off temporarily at
oughly and hold it in this position for the
the same time. The electronic immobiliser prevents unau- starter to turn the engine on.
Each time that the vehicle is restarted, the ig- thorised persons from driving the vehicle.
– Turn the ignition key to the starting posi-
nition key must be turned to position 1 . The Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates tion ››› page 155.
repetitive start prevention lock of the igni- the electronic immobiliser automatically
tion prevents possible damage to the starter when the key is inserted into the ignition. – Let go of the ignition key as soon as the en-
motor if the engine is already running. gine starts; the starter motor must not run
The electronic immobiliser will be activated on with the engine.
WARNING again automatically as soon as you pull the
key out of the ignition lock. After starting a very hot engine, you may
● The ignition key must NOT be removed from
need to slightly press down the accelerator.
the lock until the vehicle comes to a stand- The engine can only be started using a genu-
still. Otherwise, the steering could be imme- ine SEAT key with its correct code. When starting a cold engine, it may be a little
diately blocked- Risk of accident! noisy for the first few seconds until oil pres-
If the following message* is shown on the in-
● Always remove the key from the ignition sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com-
strument panel display: SAFE, the vehicle
when leaving the vehicle, even if only for a pensators. This is quite normal, and no cause
cannot be started.
short period. This is especially important if for concern.
children or disabled people are left alone in The engine can, however, be started if the
If the engine does not start immediately,
the vehicle. They could accidentally start the appropriate coded SEAT genuine key is used.
engine or work electrical equipment such as switch the starter off after 10 seconds and try
the electric windows, resulting in an acci- again after half a minute. If the engine still
dent. does not start, the fuel pump fuse should be
checked ››› page 88, Fuses.
156
Driving

WARNING engine reach operating temperature faster Glow plug system for the diesel engine

Technical data
● Never start or run the engine in unventila- and reduces emissions. To avoid unnecessary discharging of the bat-
ted or closed rooms. The exhaust gases con- tery, do not use any other major electrical
tain carbon monoxide, an odourless and col- equipment while the glow plugs are pre-heat-
ourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal acci- Starting diesel engines ing.
dents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of
consciousness and result in death.
Start the engine as soon as the glow plug
The engine can only be started using a genu- warning lamp goes out.
● Never leave the vehicle unattended if the ine SEAT key with its correct code.
engine is running.

Advice
– Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi- Starting a diesel engine after the fuel tank
● Never use “cold start sprays”, they could has been completely run dry
tion and depress the clutch pedal thor-
explode or cause the engine to run at high oughly and hold it in this position for the
revs. Risk of injury. If the fuel tank has been completely run dry,
starter to turn the engine on. it may take longer than normal (up to one mi-
– Turn the ignition key to position ››› Fig. 148 nute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling.
CAUTION
This is because the fuel system must elimi-

Operation
2 . The warning lamp  will light for en-
● When the engine is cold, you should avoid gine pre-heating. nate air first.
high engine speeds, driving at full throttle
and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine – When the lamp turns off, turn the ignition
WARNING
damage. key to position 3 to start the engine. Do
not press the accelerator. Observe the safety warnings ››› in Starting
● The vehicle should not be pushed or towed
petrol engines on page 157.
more than 50 metres to start the engine. Un-

Emergencies
– Release the ignition key as soon as the en-
burnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter gine starts. The starter motor should not
and damage it. CAUTION
turn at the same time.
● Before attempting to push-start or tow a ve- ● When the engine is cold, you should avoid
hicle in order to start it, you should first try to When starting a cold engine, it may be a little high engine speeds, driving at full throttle
start it using the battery of another vehicle. noisy for the first few seconds until oil pres- and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine
Please observe and follow the notes on the sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com- damage.
›››  page 57, How to jump start. pensators. This is quite normal, and no cause ● The vehicle should not be pushed or towed

Safety
for concern. more than 50 metres to start the engine. Un-
For the sake of the environment burnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter
If there are problems starting the engine, see
and damage it.
Do not warm-up the engine by running the the ›››  page 57.
● Before attempting to push-start or tow a ve-
engine with the vehicle stationary. Start off
immediately, driving gently. This helps the hicle in order to start it, you should first try to »
157
Operation

start it using the battery of another vehicle. brake operation cannot be performed, risk of Starter button*
Please observe and follow the notes on the accidents and serious injury may exist.
›››  page 57, How to jump start. ● The steering lock can be immediately
blocked once the key is removed from the ig-
For the sake of the environment nition. The vehicle cannot be steered. Risk of
accident.
Do not warm-up the engine by running the
● Power-assisted steering does not work
engine with the vehicle stationary. You
should drive off as soon as you start the en- when the engine is off, and more strength is
gine. This helps the engine reach operating needed to turn the wheel.
temperature faster and reduces emissions. ● If the key is removed from the ignition lock
the steering lock could be engaged and vehi-
cle steering would not work.
Fig. 149 In the lower part of the centre con-
Switching off the engine sole: starter button.
CAUTION
– Stop the vehicle. ● When the engine has been running under a
– Turn the ignition key to position ››› Fig. 148 heavy load for a long period, heat can accu-
1 . mulate in the engine compartment and cause
engine damage. For this reason, idle the en-
After switching the engine off, the radiator gine for approximately 2 minutes before
fan may run on for up to 10 minutes. It is also switching it off.
possible that the fan turns itself on once ● If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop
more if the coolant temperature increases system* switches off the engine, the ignition
due to the heat accumulated in the engine remains switched on. Make sure that the igni-
compartment or due to its prolonged expo- tion is switched off before leaving the vehi-
sure to solar radiation. cle, otherwise the battery could discharge.
Fig. 150 On the right of the steering column:
WARNING emergency start.

● Never switch the engine off until the vehi- The vehicle engine can be started with a
cle is completely stationary. starter button (Press & Drive). To do so, there
● The brake servo works only when the en- must be a valid key inside the vehicle in the
gine is running. With the engine switched off, area of the front or rear seats.
more strength is needed to brake. As normal

158
Driving

Opening the driver's door when exiting the ● Immediately after pushing the starter but- ● the driver does not step on any pedal,

Technical data
vehicle activates the electronic lock on the ton, keep the vehicle key next to the right ● the driver door is opened.
steering column if the ignition is disabled. trim of the steering column ››› Fig. 150.
● The ignition connects and the engine starts After automatically turning off the ignition, if
Switching the ignition on/off manually automatically. the dipped beam  is on, the side light re-
mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if the bat-
Briefly push the starter button without touch-
tery is sufficiently charged). If the driver locks
ing the brake or clutch pedal ››› . Emergency disconnection
the vehicle or manually turns off the light, the
For vehicles with both manual and automatic If the engine does not switch off after briefly side light goes out.

Advice
transmission, the starter button text pressing the starter button, an emergency
START ENGINE STOP flashes like a heartbeat disconnect will be required: WARNING
when the system is preset for switching the
● Press the starter button twice within 3 sec- Any accidental movement of the vehicle could
ignition on and off. result in serious injury.
onds or press it once for more than 1 sec-
ond ››› . ● When switching on the ignition, do not
Automatic ignition switch-off

Operation
● The engine turns off automatically. press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise
If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the ve- the engine could start immediately.
hicle key with them but leaving the ignition
Engine restart feature
on, the ignition is switched off automatically WARNING
after a certain time. If at that time the dipped If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle
beam is on, the parking lights will stay on for after the engine stops, you will only have 5 If vehicle keys are used negligently or with-
seconds to restart it. A warning will display out due care, this may cause accidents and

Emergencies
approx. 30 minutes. The side light can be
turned off by blocking the vehicle on the dash panel screen. serious injury.
››› page 113 or manually ››› page 127. After this interval, it will not be possible to
● Never leave any key inside the vehicle
when exiting. Otherwise, a child or unauthor-
start the engine without a valid key inside ised person could lock the vehicle, start the
Emergency starting function the vehicle. engine or connect the ignition and, in this
If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle, way, operate electronic equipment (e.g. the
an emergency start-up will be required. The Automatic deactivation of the ignition on ve- windows). »
relevant message will appear in the dash hicles with the Start-Stop system

Safety
panel display. This may happen when, for ex- The ignition is switched off automatically
ample, the battery of the vehicle key button when the vehicle is stopped and the auto-
is very low or flat: matic engine shutdown is active, if:
● The driver's seat belt is not fastened,

159
Operation

Note Starting the engine with the starter but- ● If the engine is cold, avoid high engine
Step
● Before leaving the vehicle, always discon- ton ››› page 158. speeds, pushing the engine too hard and rap-
id acceleration.
nect the ignition manually and, if appropri- Briefly press the starter button ››› Fig. 149 with-
ate, take into account the instructions on the ● Do not start the engine by pushing the ve-
out pressing the accelerator. For the engine to
screen of the dash panel. start there must be a valid key in the vehicle.
hicle or towing it. Unburnt fuel could enter
3. the catalytic converter and damage it.
● If the vehicle is stationary for a long time After starting the engine, the light of the
with the ignition on, the vehicle battery START ENGINE STOP button changes to a fixed

might be discharged and it might not be pos- light indicating that the engine has started.
Note
sible to start the engine. If the engine does not start, stop and wait for ● Do not wait until the engine warms up with
● In diesel vehicles, there may be a delay in 4. approx. 1 minute before trying again. If neces- the vehicle stationary; if you have good visi-
the engine starting if it requires preheating. sary, perform an emergency start ››› page 159. bility through the windows, start driving im-
● If during the STOP phase you press the Disconnect the electronic parking brake when mediately. This helps the engine reach oper-
button, the ignition is 5. ating temperature faster and reduces emis-
START ENGINE STOP you are about to start driving ››› page 161.
switched off and the button flashes. sions.
● If the indication “Start-Stop system deacti- WARNING ● Electrical components with a high power
vated: Start the engine manually” is dis- consumption are switched off temporarily
played on the dash panel display, the Never leave the vehicle with the engine run- when the engine starts.
START ENGINE STOP button will blink. ning, especially if a gear or gear range is en-
● When starting with a cold engine, noise
gaged. The vehicle could then suddenly move
levels may briefly increase. This is quite nor-
or something strange could happen that
mal, and no cause for concern.
would cause damage, fire or serious injury.
Starting the engine ● When the outside temperature is below
+5 °C (+41 °F), if the engine is diesel, some
3 Valid for vehicles: with starter button. WARNING smoke may appear under the vehicle when
Cold start sprays could explode or cause a the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.
Starting the engine with the starter but-
Step sudden increase in the engine speed.
ton ››› page 158.
● Never use sprays to cold start the engine.

1.
Press and hold the brake pedal until step 5 is Stopping the engine
performed.
CAUTION 3 Valid for vehicles: with starter button.
In vehicles with a manual gearbox: press and ● The starter motor or the engine may be
1a.
hold the clutch down until the engine starts. Switch off the engine with the starter
damaged if you try to start the engine while Step
Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the selector driving or if you restart it immediately after button ››› page 158.
2. switching it off.
lever in position P or N.
1. Stop the vehicle completely ››› .
160
Driving

CAUTION START ENGINE STOP button and the lighting


Switch off the engine with the starter

Technical data
Step changing from flashing to fixed will depend
button ››› page 158. If the engine is made to work hard for a long on engine characteristics. Upon switching the
time, it may overheat after being switched
2.
Press and hold the brake pedal until the step ignition off with the START ENGINE STOP button,
4 is performed. off. To prevent damage to the engine before
it starts flashing again.
switching it off, leave it idle for approx. 2 mi-
If you are driving an automatic vehicle, place nutes in neutral. In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the
3.
the selector lever in position P. “My Beat” function also offers additional in-
Connect the electronic parking brake Note formation:
4.

Advice
››› page 161.
After switching off the engine, the cooling fan ● When the engine stops during the Stop
Briefly press the start-up button ››› Fig. 149. may continue to operate in the engine com- phase, the light of the START ENGINE STOP but-
The START ENGINE STOP button blinks again. If partment for a few more minutes, even with ton stays on, since, even though the engine
5.
the engine fails to switch off, perform an emer- the ignition off. The radiator fan is automati- is off, the Start-Stop system is active.
gency disconnect ››› page 159. cally switched off.
● When the engine cannot be stated again
with the Start-Stop system, ››› page 175, and

Operation
If the vehicle is equipped with a manual gear-
6.
box, put it into 1st or reverse.
needs to be started manually, the
“My Beat” Function START ENGINE STOP button flashes to indicate
WARNING this fact.
For vehicles with a convenience key there is
Never switch off the engine while the vehicle
the “My Beat” function. This feature provides
is moving. This could cause loss of control of
an additional indication of the vehicle igni-

Emergencies
the vehicle, accidents and serious injury.
● The airbags and belt tensioners do not
tion system. Braking and parking
work when the ignition is switched off. When accessing the vehicle, e.g. by opening
the doors with the remote control, the Braking capacity and braking distance
● The brake servo does not work with the en-
START ENGINE STOP button flashes, drawing at-
gine off. Therefore, you need to press the
tention to the relevant starter system button. The efficiency of the brakes depends directly
break pedal harder to brake the vehicle.
on the brake pad wear. This wear depends to
● Power steering does not work when the en- Upon switching the ignition on/off, the light a great extent on the conditions under which

Safety
gine is not running. You need more strength of the START ENGINE STOP button flashes. With the vehicle is operated and the way the vehi-
to steer when the engine is switched off. the engine switched off, after a few seconds, cle is driven. If you often drive in town, drive
● If the ignition is switched off, the steering the STOP ENGINE START button stops flashing short distances or have a sporty driving style,
column could be locked, making it impossible and goes out. we recommend that you have the thickness »
to control the vehicle.
The time that elapses between the moment
when the user starts the engine using the
161
Operation

of your brake pads checked by technical serv- the brakes to overheat and the braking dis- WARNING
ices more frequently than recommended in tance will increase. Apply and then release ● If the brake warning lamp does not go out
the Maintenance Programme. the brakes alternately.
or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid
If you drive with wet brakes, for example, af- ● Never let the vehicle run with the engine level in the reservoir is too low so there is a
ter crossing areas of water, on days of heavy switched off. The braking distance is in- risk of an accident ››› page 240, Brake fluid.
rainfall or even after washing the car, the ef- creased considerably when the brake servo is Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain
fect of the brakes is reduced as the brake not active. technical assistance.
discs are wet or even frozen (in winter): in ● If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is ● If the brake warning lamp lights up  to-
this case, the brakes should be “dried” by subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles can gether with the ABS lamp  this could be
pressing the brake pedal several times. form in the brake system. This reduces the ef- due to an ABS fault. This could cause the rear
ficiency of the brakes. wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This
WARNING ● Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could cause the rear to break away. Risk of
could restrict the airflow to the brakes and skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical
Longer braking distances and faults in the assistance.
cause them to overheat. Before purchasing
brake system increase the risk of accidents.
accessories please observe the relevant in-
● New brake pads must be run in and do not structions ››› page 220, Modifications.
have the correct friction during the first
200 km. This reduced braking capacity may
● If a brake system circuit fails, the braking Handbrake
distance will be increased considerably. Con-
be compensated for by pressing on the brake
tact a specialised workshop immediately and
pedal a little harder, which also applies when
avoid unnecessary journeys.
the brake pads have to be changed further
on.
● If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are
driving on roads which have been salted, Control lamp
braking power may be lower than normal.
Situations in which the warning lamp lights
● On steep slopes, if brakes are excessively
up *
used, they will overheat. Before driving down
a long steep slope, it is advisable to reduce ● the brake fluid level is too low
speed and change down into a lower gear or ››› page 240.
range (depending on the type of transmis- ● there is a fault in the brake system. Fig. 151 Handbrake between the front seats.
sion). Thus, make use of engine braking and
relieve the brakes. This warning lamp can light up together with The handbrake should be applied firmly to
● Never let the brakes “drag” by applying the ABS system warning lamp. prevent the vehicle from accidentally rolling
light pressure. Continuous braking will cause away. Always apply the handbrake when you
leave your vehicle and when you park.
162
Driving

Applying the handbrake CAUTION ● If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn

Technical data
– Pull the handbrake lever up firmly the front wheels so that they point away from
Always apply the handbrake before you leave the kerb.
››› Fig. 151. the vehicle. Put it in 1st gear as well. In vehi-
cles with an automatic gearbox, place the ● Secure the vehicle as usual by applying the
Releasing the handbrake gear lever in position P. handbrake firmly and putting it in 1st gear.
– Pull the lever up slightly and press the re-
WARNING
lease knob in the direction of the arrow
››› Fig. 151 and guide the handbrake lever Parking ● Take measures to reduce the risk of injury

Advice
down fully ››› . when you leave your vehicle unattended.
The handbrake should always be firmly ap- ● Never park where the hot exhaust system
Always pull the handbrake all the way up, so plied when the vehicle is parked. could ignite inflammable materials, such as
there is less risk of driving off with it still en- dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.
gaged ››› . Always note the following points when park-
● Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in
ing the vehicle:
The handbrake warning lamp  lights up the vehicle when it is locked. They would be

Operation
when the handbrake is applied and the igni- – Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. unable to open the vehicle from the inside,
tion switched on. The warning lamp turns off and could become trapped in the vehicle in
– Apply the handbrake.
when the handbrake is released. an emergency. In the event of an emergency,
– Put it in 1st gear. locked doors will delay assistance to vehicle
occupants.
WARNING – Switch the engine off and remove the key
● Never leave children alone in the vehicle.
from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel

Emergencies
● Never use the handbrake to stop the vehi-
They could set the vehicle in motion, for ex-
cle when it is in motion. The braking distance slightly to engage the steering lock.
ample, by releasing the handbrake or the
is considerably longer, because braking is – Always take you keys with you when you gearbox lever.
only applied to the rear wheels. Risk of acci-
leave the vehicle ››› . ● Depending on weather conditions, it may
dent!
become extremely hot or cold inside the vehi-
● If the handbrake is only partially released, Additional notes on parking the vehicle on cle. This can be fatal.
this will cause the rear brakes to overheat, gradients:
which can impair the function of the brake
Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle

Safety
system and could lead to an accident. This al-
so causes premature wear on the rear brake rolls against the kerb if it started to roll.
pads. ● If the vehicle is parked facing downhill,
turn the front wheels so that they point to-
wards the kerb.

163
Operation

Braking and stability systems Electronic Stability Control (ESC)* The control lamp  has the following func-
The ESC reduces the risk of skidding by brak- tions:
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)* ing the wheels individually. ● It flashes whilst driving when the ASR/ESC
is activated.
The system uses the steering wheel angle
This Electronic Stability System reduces the ● It will light up if there is a fault in the ESC.
and road speed to calculate the changes of
risk of skidding and improves the vehicle's
direction desired by the driver, and constant- ● As the ESC operates in conjunction with the
stability and ability to hold the road.
ly compares them with the actual behaviour ABS, the ESC light will also come on if a fault
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) contains of the vehicle. When irregularities occur, for should occur in the ABS.
the electronic differential lock (EDL) and the example, if the vehicle begins to skid, the
traction control system (ASR). The ESC works ESC brakes the appropriate wheel automati- If the ESC control lamp  lights up and stays
together with the ABS. Both control lamps cally. on after the engine is started, this may mean
will light up if the ESC or ABS systems are that the control system has temporarily
The forces acting on the braked wheel bring switched off the ESC. In this case the ESC can
faulty.
the vehicle back to a stable condition. If the be reactivated by switching the ignition off
The ESC system is started automatically vehicle tends to oversteer (the rear end and then on again. If the control lamp goes
when the engine is started. slides out), the system will act on the front out, this means the system is fully functional.
wheel on the outside of the turn.
The ESC system is always active and cannot
be switched off. With the Easy Connect sys- The  lamp provides information about the
Control lamp disconnection status of the system:
tem it is only possible to deactivate the ASR
or else select Sport mode. There are two control lamps for the electronic ● It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected on
stability control. The lamp  provides infor- pressing the switch  or if we select ESC
The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin
mation concerning function and  disconnec- Sport mode, only by means of Easy Connect.
is desirable ››› page 165.
tion status.
For example: WARNING
Both control lamps light up together when
● When driving with snow chains. the ignition is switched on and should turn ● Do not forget that the electronic stability
off after approximately 2 seconds. This is the control ESC cannot defy the laws of physics.
● When driving in deep snow or on loose sur-
time taken for the function check. This should be kept in mind, particularly on
faces.
slippery and wet roads and when towing a
● When the vehicle is stuck, to rock it back- This programme includes the ABS, EDL and
trailer.
wards and forwards. ASR. It also includes emergency braking as-
● Always adapt your driving style to suit the
sistance (BAS).
condition of the roads and the traffic situa-
Press the button to switch the ASR back on
tion. The greater safety provided by the ESC
when you no longer need wheel spin. should not encourage you to run any risks.
164
Driving

CAUTION When the ASR is off, the warning lamp lights should occur in the ABS because the ASR op-

Technical data
up . The ASR should normally be left on. erates in conjunction with the ABS. For fur-
● To ensure that the ESC works correctly, all
Only in exceptional circumstances, when ther information, see ››› page 165.
four wheels must be fitted with the same
wheel spin is required, can they be turned off
tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of
using the Easy Connect system, for example: The  lamp provides information about the
the tyres can cause the system to reduce en-
gine power when this is not desired. disconnection status of the system:*
● With compact temporary spare wheel.
● Any modifications made to the vehicle (for ● It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected
● When using the snow chains.
example, to the engine, brake system, run- via Easy Connect.
● When driving in deep snow or on soft ter-

Advice
ning gear or to the combination of wheels
and tyres) may affect the operation of the rain. By means of Easy Connect, the ASR function
ABS, EDL, ESC and ASR. ● When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it
is reactivated and the warning lamp switched
off.
“by rocking it.”

The ASR should be switched on again as WARNING


Traction control system (ASR)
soon as possible.

Operation
● Remember that not even the ASR can defy
The traction control system prevents the driv- the laws of physics. This should be kept in
en wheels from spinning when the vehicle is Control lamp mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads
accelerating. and when towing a trailer.
There are three control lamps for the traction
control system:  (for vehicles equipped ● Always adapt your driving style to suit the
Description and operation of the traction with M-ABS),  (for vehicles equipped with condition of the roads and the traffic situa-

Emergencies
control system during acceleration (ASR) tion. The greater safety provided by the ASR
ESC) and . The control lamps light up to-
should not encourage you to run any risks.
The ASR system intervenes, reducing engine gether when the ignition is switched on and
power and preventing the driven wheels from should turn off after approximately 2 sec-
slipping during acceleration. onds. This is the time taken for the function CAUTION
check. ● To ensure that the ASR works correctly,
TCS helps the car to start moving, accelerate
identical tyres should be fitted on all four
and climb a gradient in slippery conditions The  or  lamp has the following function: wheels. Any differences in the rolling radius
where this may otherwise be difficult or even of the tyres can cause the system to reduce

Safety
impossible. ● It flashes when the ASR is working if the ve-
engine power when this is not desired.
hicle is moving.
The ASR automatically switches on when the ● Any modifications made to the vehicle (for
engine is started. If necessary, it could be If the system is deactivated or if it has any example, to the engine, brake system, run-
connected or disconnected by means of the fault, the warning lamp will remain lit. The ning gear or to the combination of wheels »
Easy Connect system*. warning lamp will also light up if a fault
165
Operation

and tyres) may affect the operation of the The control lamp  lights up. For vehicles the  button and the Setup and ESC System
ABS and ASR. with a driver information system*, the driver function buttons.
will be shown the electronic stability
control (ESC) option: sport. WARNING
Warning! Limited stability. You should switch on the ESC Sport mode on-
Connecting/disconnecting ESC and
ly if the traffic conditions and your driving
ASR* Disable ESC “Sport” mode ability allow you to do so safely: risk of skid-
Through the Easy Connect system menu ding!
The ESC is switched on automatically when
the engine is started, and only works when ››› page 105. The warning lamp  will switch ● With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising
the engine is running and includes the ABS, off. For vehicles with a driver information sys- function will be limited to allow for a sportier
tem*, the driver will be shown the elec- drive. The driving wheels could spin and the
EDL and ASR systems.
tronic stability control (ESC) vehicle could skid.
The ASR and ESC function should only be option: on.
switched off in situations in which traction is
Note
insufficient, among others: Disable ASR If the ASR is disconnected or the ESC’s Sport
● When driving in deep snow or on surfaces The Easy Connect system menu is used to mode is selected, cruise control* will be
that are not very firm. switch off the ASR ››› page 105. The traction switched off.
● To “free” the vehicle if it gets stuck. control system will be disabled.
The control lamp  lights up. For vehicles
Then switch the ASR and ESC function back Electronic differential lock (EDL)*
with a driver information system* the driver
on.
will be informed that ASR is disabled.
Depending on finishes and versions, it is The EDL operates along with the ABS in vehi-
possible either to disconnect only the ASR or Activate ASR cles equipped with Electronic Stability Con-
else activate ESC Sport mode. trol (ESC)*.
The Easy Connect system menu ››› page 105
is used to switch on the ASR. The traction EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accel-
ESC in “Sport” mode control system will be enabled. erate and climb a gradient in slippery condi-
Sport mode can be connected via the Easy tions where this may otherwise be difficult or
The control lamp  switches off. For vehicles even impossible.
Connect ››› page 105 system menu. The abili-
with a driver information system* the driver
ty of the ESC to stabilise the vehicle is limi- It uses the ABS sensors to monitor the speed
will be informed that ASR is enabled.
ted; the traction control system (ASR) be- of the driven wheels.
comes disabled ››› . ● Activate or deactivate the ASR or ESC func-
At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h
tion in the Easy Connect system by means of
(50 mph), it is able to balance out differences
166
Driving

in the speed of the driven wheels of approxi- CAUTION a standstill, the hazard warning lights will

Technical data
mately 100 rpm/min caused by a partially then come on and the brake lights will re-
slippery road surface. It does this by braking Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the en- main on permanently from that moment. The
gine, the brake system, running gear or any
the wheel which has lost traction and distrib- warning lights will automatically switch off
components affecting the wheels and tyres)
uting more driving force to the other driven when the vehicle begins to move again or
could affect the efficiency of the EDL
wheel via the differential. ››› page 220. when the "warning" light button is pressed.
To prevent the disc brake of the braking
WARNING
wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out au-
● The risk of accident is higher if you drive

Advice
tomatically if subjected to excessive loads. Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)*
The vehicle will continue to function normally too fast, if you do not keep your distance from
without EDL. For this reason, the driver is not the vehicle in front, and when the road sur-
The function (Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA) is
informed that the EDL has been switched off. face is slippery or wet. The increased acci-
only included in vehicles with ESC.
dent risk cannot be reduced by the brake as-
The EDL will switch on again automatically In an emergency, most drivers brake in time, sist system.
when the brake has cooled down. but not with maximum force. This results in ● The brake assist system cannot defy the

Operation
unnecessarily long braking distances. laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are
Control lamp dangerous even with the brake assist system!
This is when the brake assist system comes
A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the Therefore, it is essential that you adjust your
into action. When pressing the brake pedal speed to suit the road and traffic conditions.
ESC control lamp . Take the vehicle to a rapidly, the assistant interprets it as an emer- Do not let the extra safety features tempt you
specialised workshop as soon as possible. gency. It very quickly builds up the full brake into taking any risks when driving.

Emergencies
pressure so that the ABS can be activated
WARNING more quickly and efficiently, thus reducing
● When accelerating on a slippery surface, braking distance.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
for example on ice and snow, press the accel-
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake ped-
erator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven
al, since the brake assist system switches off The anti-lock brake (ABS) system prevents
wheels may start to spin. This could impair
the vehicle's stability.
automatically as soon as you release the the wheels from locking during braking and
brake. is an important part of the vehicle's active
● Always adapt your driving style to suit road

Safety
safety system.
conditions and the traffic situation. Do not let
Automatic hazard warning lights activation
the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you in-
to taking any risks when driving, this can The brake lights flash automatically to indi- How the ABS works
cause accidents. cate that the vehicle is braking suddenly or in If one of the wheels turns too slowly in rela-
an emergency situation. If the emergency tion to the vehicle's speed, and is close to
braking continues until the vehicle comes to locking, the system will reduce the braking »
167
Operation

pressure to this wheel. The driver is made The vehicle can still be braked in the normal WARNING
aware of this control process by a pulsating way, without the ABS function. Take the vehi-
● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-
of the brake pedal and audible noise. This is cle to a specialised workshop as soon as
serve the warnings ››› page 232, Working in
a deliberate warning to the driver that one or possible.
the engine compartment.
more of the wheels is tending to lock and the
If there is a fault in the ABS, the ESC* and the ● If the brake system warning lamp  should
ABS control function has intervened. In this
tyre pressure control lamp will also light up. light up together with the ABS warning lamp
situation it is important to keep the brake
, stop the vehicle immediately and check
pedal fully depressed so the ABS can regu-
Brake system fault the brake fluid level in the reservoir
late the brake application. Do not “pump”.
››› page 240, Brake fluid. If the brake fluid
If the ABS warning lamp  lights up together
If you brake hard on a slippery road surface, level has dropped below the “MIN” mark you
with the brake warning lamp , there is a must not drive on. Risk of accident. Obtain
the best possible control is retained as the
fault in the ABS function and in the brake technical assistance.
wheels do not lock.
system ››› .
● If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in
However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee
the brake system may have been caused by a
shorter braking distances in all conditions. WARNING
failure of the ABS system. This could cause
Braking distance could even be further if you ● The anti-lock brake system cannot defy the the rear wheels to lock quickly when you
brake on gravel or on fresh snow on a slip- laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are brake. This could cause the rear to break
pery surface. dangerous even with ABS! If you notice that away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and
the ABS is working (to counteract locked seek technical assistance.
Control lamp wheels under braking), you should reduce
speed immediately to suit the road and traffic
The control lamp  lights up for a few sec-
conditions. Do not let the extra safety fea-
onds when the ignition is switched on. It tures tempt you into taking any risks when Electronic differential lock (XDS)*
goes out again after the system has run driving.
through an automatic test sequence. When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-
● The effectiveness of ABS is also determined
tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to turn
by the tyres fitted ››› page 243.
There is a fault in the ABS if: at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In
● If the running gear or brake system is modi- this way, the wheel that is turning faster (out-
● The control lamp  does not light up when fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se- er wheel) receives less drive torque than the
the ignition is switched on. verely limited. inner wheel. This may mean that in certain
● The control lamp does not go out again af- situations the torque delivered to the inner
ter a few seconds. wheel is too high, causing the wheels to
● The control lamp lights up when the vehicle spin. On the other hand, the outer wheel is
is moving. receiving a lower drive torque than it could
transmit. This causes an overall loss of lateral
168
Driving

grip on the front axle, resulting in understeer tance is increased considerably when the ● besides having a gear engaged or being in

Technical data
or “lengthening” of the trajectory. brake servo is not active. neutral for manual gear change and with the
● If the brake servo is not working, for exam-
selector lever at position S, D or R for an au-
The XDS system can detect and correct this
ple when the vehicle is being towed, you will tomatic gearbox.
effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC.
have to press the brake pedal considerably
Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside This system is also active when reversing up-
harder than normal.
wheel and counter the excess driving torque hill.
of that wheel. This means that the driver's
desired trajectory is much more precise. WARNING
Hill driving assistant*

Advice
● If you do not start the vehicle immediately
The XDS system works in combination with
after taking your foot off the brake pedal, the
the ESC and is always active, even when ASR This function is only included in vehicles with
vehicle may start to roll back under certain
traction control is disconnected or the ESC is ESC. conditions. Depress the brake pedal or use
in Sport mode. the hand brake immediately.
The hill driving assistant helps the driver to
move off and upward on a hill when the vehi- ● If the engine stalls, depress the brake ped-

Operation
cle is stationary. al or use the hand brake immediately.
Brake servo ● When following a line of traffic uphill, if you
The system maintains brake pressure for ap-
proximately two seconds after the driver want to prevent the vehicle from rolling back
The brake servo increases the pressure you
accidentally when starting off, hold the brake
apply to the brake pedal. It works only when takes his foot off the brake pedal to prevent
pedal down for a few seconds before starting
the engine is running. the vehicle from lurching backward when it is
off.

Emergencies
started. During these 2 seconds, the driver
If the brake servo is not functioning, e.g. due has enough time to release the clutch pedal
to a malfunction, or if the vehicle is being and accelerate without the vehicle moving Note
towed, you will have to press the brake pedal and without having to use the handbrake, The Official Service or a specialist workshop
considerably harder to make up for the lack making start-up easier, more comfortable can tell you if your vehicle is equipped with
of servo assistance. and safer. this system.

WARNING These are the basic operation conditions:

Safety
The braking distance can also be affected by ● being on a ramp or hill/slope,
external factors.
● doors closed,
● Never let the vehicle coast with the engine
switched off. Failure to follow this instruction ● vehicle completely stationary,
could result in an accident. The braking dis- ● engine running and foot on the brake,

169
Operation

Manual gearbox ● When changing gear, you should always Information regarding the “cleanliness” of
depress the clutch fully to avoid unnecessary the diesel particulate filter
Driving with manual gearbox wear and damage. The exhaust system manager detects that the
● Do not “slip” the clutch to hold the vehicle diesel particulate filter is nearly saturated
Read the additional information carefully on a hill. This causes premature wear and and contributes to self-cleaning by recom-
›››  page 38 damage to the clutch. mending the optimal gear. For this purpose it
● Do not leave your foot on the clutch pedal; might be necessary to drive momentarily with
Certain versions of the model may include a although the pressure may seem insignifi- a high rpm.
6-speed manual gearbox, and its diagram is cant, it can cause the premature wear of the
shown on the gearbox lever. clutch plate. Use the foot rest when you do WARNING
not need to change gear.
The reverse gear can only be engaged when The gear change indicator is only an auxiliary
the car is stationary. When the engine is run- function and in no case should be a substi-
ning and before engaging this gear, wait tute for careful driving.
about 6 seconds with the clutch pressed Gear-change indicator ● The responsibility of choosing the correct
down thoroughly in order to protect the gear- gear depending on the situation (e.g. over-
box. Depending on vehicle equipment, the recom- taking, driving up or down a slope or towing a
mended gear for saving fuel may be indica- trailer) lies with the driver.
The reverse lights switch on when the reverse ted on the dash screen during driving.
gear is selected and the ignition is on.
In vehicles with automatic gearbox, for this For the sake of the environment
WARNING purpose the selector lever must be in the Tip- Selecting the correct gear can help to save
● When the engine is running, the vehicle
tronic position. fuel.
will start to move as soon as a gear is engag- If the current gear engaged is optimal no rec-
ed and the clutch released. ommendation will be displayed. The gear cur- Note
● Never select the reverse gear when the ve- rently engaged will be displayed.
The recommended gear display is switched
hicle is in motion. Risk of accident.
off when the clutch pedal is pressed in vehi-
Display Meaning cles with manual gearbox, or when the selec-
Note tor lever is moved from the Tiptronic position
 The optimal gear is selected.
in automatic gearbox vehicles.
● Do not rest your hand on the gear lever
Changing to a higher gear is recom-
while driving. The pressure of your hand  mended.
could cause premature wear on the selector
forks in the gearbox. Changing to a lower gear is recom-
 mended.

170
Driving

Run-in and economical driving Tyre and brake pad run-in Constructive measures to encourage recy-

Technical data
cling
New tyres should be run in carefully for the
Running in a new engine ● Joints and connections designed for easy
first 500 km (300 miles) and new brake pads dismantling.
The engine needs to be run-in over the first should be run in carefully for the first 200 km
● Modular construction to facilitate disman-
1500 km (900 miles). (125 miles).
tling.
During the first 200 km (125 miles), you can
● Increased use of single-grade materials.
For the first 1000 km (600 miles) compensate for the reduced braking effect by
applying more pressure to the brake pedal. In ● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in

Advice
– Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3
case of a sharp braking, the braking distance accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and
the maximum speed.
will be longer with new brake pads than with ISO 1629.
– Do not accelerate hard. brake pads which have been run-in.
– Avoid high engine revolutions.
Choice of materials
WARNING ● Use of recycled materials.
– Do not tow a trailer.

Operation
● At first, new tyres do not give maximum ● Use of compatible plastics in the same part
grip, and require running-in. This may cause if its components are not easily separated.
From 1000 kilometres (600 miles) to 1500 an accident. Drive particularly carefully in the
kilometres (900 miles) first 500 km (300 miles).
● Use of recycled materials and/or materials
– Speeds can be gradually increased to the originating from renewable sources.
● New brake pads must be “run in” and do
maximum road speed or maximum permis- not have the correct friction properties during ● Reduction of volatile components, includ-

Emergencies
sible engine speed (rpm). the first 200 km (125 miles). However, the re- ing odour, in plastic materials.
duced braking capacity may be compensated ● Use of CFC-free coolants.
During its first few hours of running, the in- by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder.
ternal friction in the engine is greater than Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions
later on, when all the moving parts have bed- dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive
ded in. 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa-
Environmental compatibility
valent chromium.
For the sake of the environment
Environmental protection is a top priority in

Safety
If the engine is run in gently, its life will be in- the design, choice of materials and manufac- Manufacturing methods
creased and its oil consumption reduced. ture of your new SEAT. ● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the
protective wax for cavities.
● Use of plastic film as protection during ve-
hicle transport. »
171
Operation

● Use of solvent-free adhesives. tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are tant emissions are also especially high dur-
● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- reduced to zero (disconnection due to iner- ing this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore
tems. tia). best to drive off immediately after starting
the engine. Avoid running the engine at high
● Recycling and energy recovery from resi-
Change gear early to save energy speed.
dues (RDF).
● Improvement in the quality of waste water.
An effective way of saving fuel is to change
up quickly through the gears. Running the Periodic maintenance
● Use of systems for the recovery of residual engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses Periodic maintenance work guarantees that,
heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, an unnecessary amount of fuel. before beginning a journey, you will not con-
etc.). sume more than the required amount of fuel.
Manual gearbox: shift up from first to second
● The use of water-soluble paints. A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit
gear as soon as possible. We recommend
of improved fuel efficiency as well as maxi-
that, whenever possible, you change to a
mum reliability and an enhanced resale val-
higher gear upon reaching 2000 rpm. Follow
Economical and environmentally- ue.
the “recommended gear” indication that ap-
friendly driving pears on the instrument panel ››› page 170. A badly serviced engine can consume up to
10% more fuel than necessary.
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution Avoid driving at high speed
and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres de- Avoid short journeys
We advise you not to drive at the top speed
pends in large part on your driving style. By
permitted by the vehicle. Fuel consumption, To reduce the consumption and emission of
adopting an economical driving style and an-
exhaust emissions and noise levels all in- polluting exhaust gases, the engine and the
ticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can
crease very rapidly at higher speeds. Driving exhaust gas filtration systems should reach
easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%.
at moderate speeds will help to save fuel. the optimum operating temperature.
Some tips on how to help you reduce pollu-
tion while saving money are listed below. With the engine cold, fuel consumption is
Avoid idling
proportionally higher. The engine does not
Drive anticipating the traffic situation It is worthwhile switching off the engine warm up and fuel consumption does not nor-
when waiting in a traffic jam, at level cross- malise until having driven approximately four
A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating.
ings or at traffic lights with a long red phase. kilometres (2.5 miles). This is why we recom-
When you anticipate situations, you have to
The fuel saved after only 30 - 40 seconds is mend avoiding short trips whenever possi-
brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If
greater than the amount of fuel needed to re- ble.
it is possible, let the vehicle roll with a gear
start the engine.
engaged, for example, if you see a red light
ahead. The braking effect achieved in this The engine takes a long time to warm up
way helps to reduce the wear of brakes and when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-
172
Driving

Maintain the correct tyre pressures ces when you do not need them. Examples of Engine management and ex-

Technical data
Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an ad- devices that use a lot of electricity are: the
blower at high speeds, the rear window heat- haust gas purification system
equate pressure saves fuel. If the tyre pres-
sure is just one bar (14.5 psi/100 kPa) too ing or the seat heaters*.
low, fuel consumption can increase by as
Introduction
much as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resist- Note
ance, under-inflation also increases tyre wear ● If your vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not rec- WARNING
wear and impairs handling. ommended that you switch this function off. ● Because of the high temperatures which
can occur in the exhaust purification system

Advice
● It is recommended that you close the win-
The tyre pressures should always be checked
dows when driving at more than 60 km/h (catalytic converter or diesel particulate fil-
when the tyres are cold. ter), do not park the vehicle where the ex-
(37 mph).
Do not use winter tyres all year round as they ● Do not drive with your foot resting on the
haust can come into contact with flammable
increase fuel consumption by up to 10%. materials under the car (e.g. on grass or at
clutch pedal,, as the pressure can make the
the forest edge). Fire hazard!
plate spin, more fuel will be used and it can
● Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle

Operation
Avoid unnecessary weight burn the clutch plate lining, causing a serious
fault. around the area of the exhaust system: Fire
Given that every kilo of extra weight will in- hazard!
crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable ● Do not hold the car on a hill with the clutch,
to always check the luggage compartment to use the foot brake or hand brake, using the
make sure that no unnecessary loads are be- latter to start. The fuel consumption will be Note
lower and you will prevent the clutch plate
ing transported. While the control lamps , ,  or  re-
from being damaged.

Emergencies
main lit, there may be engine problems, fuel
A roof rack is often left in place for the sake ● On descents, use the engine brake, chang- consumption may increase and the engine
of convenience, even when it is no longer ing to the gear that is more suitable for the may lose power.
needed. At a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph) slope. Fuel consumption will be “zero” and
and 120 km/h (75 mph) your vehicle will use the brakes will not suffer.
about 12% more fuel as a result of the extra
wind resistance caused by the roof rack even Catalytic converter
when it is not in use.
To maintain the useful life of the catalytic

Safety
converter
Save electricity
– Use only unleaded petrol with petrol en-
The engine activates the alternator, which
gines, as lead damages the catalytic con-
produces electricity. With the need for elec-
verter.
tricity, fuel consumption also increases. Be-
cause of this, always turn off electrical devi- – Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank. »
173
Operation

– For engine oil changes, do not replenish Engine management*  Engine pre-heating/fault system* 
with too much engine oil ››› page 237, Top-
ping up engine oil. This warning lamp monitors the engine man- The warning lamp lights up to show that the
agement system for petrol engines. glow plugs are preheating the diesel engine.
– Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump
leads if necessary ›››  page 57. The warning lamp  (Electronic Power Con-
The control lamp  lights up
trol) lights up when the ignition is switched
If you notice misfiring, uneven running or on while system operation is being verified. It If the control lamp  lights up when the en-
loss of power when the vehicle is moving, re- should go out once the engine is started. gine is started it means that the glow plugs
duce speed immediately and have the vehi- are preheating. The engine can be started
cle inspected at the nearest specialised If there is a fault in the electronic engine
straight away when the lamp switches off.
workshop. In general, the exhaust warning management system while you are driving,
lamp will light up when any of the described this warning lamp will light up. Take the vehi-
Control lamp  flashes
symptoms occur ››› page 104. If this hap- cle to a specialised workshop as soon as
pens, unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust sys- possible and have the engine checked. If a fault develops in the engine management
tem and escape into the environment. The system while you are driving, the glow plug
catalytic converter can also be damaged by system lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to
overheating. Emission control system*  a specialised workshop as soon as possible
and have the engine checked.
CAUTION Control lamp  flashes:
Never run the fuel tank completely dry be- When there is misfiring that can damage the
cause the irregularity of the fuel supply may catalytic converter. Reduce speed and drive Driving tips
cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt carefully to the nearest specialised workshop
fuel to enter the exhaust system, which could to have the engine checked. Driving abroad
cause overheating and damage the catalytic
converter. The control lamp  lights up: To drive abroad, the following must be taken
If a fault has developed during driving which into consideration:
For the sake of the environment has reduced the quality of the exhaust gas ● For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter
Even when the emission control system is (e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and
ensure that unleaded petrol is available for
working perfectly, there may be a smell of drive carefully to the nearest specialised
the journey. See the chapter “Refuelling”. Au-
sulphur from the exhaust gas under some workshop to have the engine checked.
conditions. This depends on the sulphur con-
tomobile organisations will have information
tent of the fuel used. Quite often the problem about service station networks selling unlea-
can be solved by changing to another brand ded fuel.
of fuel.
174
Driver assistance systems

● In some countries, it is possible that your WARNING Driver assistance systems

Technical data
car model is not sold, and therefore some
spare parts are not available or the technical After driving through water, mud, sludge,
services may only be able to carry out limited
etc., the braking effect can be delayed slight- Start-Stop System*
ly due to moisture build-up on the discs and
repairs.
brake pads. Applying the brakes carefully
several times will remove the moisture and Description and operation
SEAT importers and distributors will gladly
restore the full braking effect.
provide information about the technical prep- The Start-Stop system helps save fuel and re-
aration that your vehicle requires and also duce CO2 emissions.

Advice
about necessary maintenance and repair CAUTION
possibilities. In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati-
● Driving through flooded areas may severely
cally switch off when the vehicle stops or is
damage vehicle components such as the en-
Adhesive strips for headlights the stopping phase; for example when stop-
gine, transmission, running gear or electrical
ping at traffic lights. The ignition remains
In countries where vehicles drive on the other system.
switched on during the stopping phase. The
side of the road to your home country, the ● Whenever driving through water, the Start-
»

Operation
engine automatically switches back on when
asymmetric dipped beam may dazzle drivers Stop system* must be switched off
of oncoming vehicles. ››› page 175.
To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers
to certain parts of the headlight lenses. Fur- Note
ther information is available at any Technical ● Check the depth of the water before enter-

Emergencies
Service. ing the flooded zone.
● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse, or
stop the engine in any situation.
Driving on flooded roads ● Note that vehicles travelling in the opposite
direction may splash water that could exceed
To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv- the maximum permitted water height for your
ing through water, for example, along a floo- vehicle.
ded road, please observe the following:

Safety
● Avoid driving through salt water (corro-
sion).
● The water should never come above the
lower edge of the bodywork.
● Drive at pedestrian speed.

175
Operation

required. In this situation, the light of the manner, there is a greater risk of accidents Vehicles with an automatic gearbox
START ENGINE STOP button stays on1). and serious injury. – Use the foot brake to bring the vehicle to a
As soon as the ignition is switched on, the ● Never remove the key from the ignition if stop and keep the brake pedal pressed
Start-Stop function is automatically activa- the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer- down with your foot. The engine will switch
ted. ing could lock making it impossible to steer off. The warning lamp  will appear in the
the vehicle. display. The engine may stop before stop-
Further information can be found about the ● To avoid injury, make sure that the Start- ping the vehicle in the deceleration phase
Start-Stop system in the Easy Connect Sys- Stop system is switched off when working in (at 7 km/h or 2 km/h depending on the ve-
tem: Press the  button in the Vehicle the engine compartment ››› page 177. hicle’s gearbox).
status menu.
– When you take your foot off the brake pedal
Basic requirements for the Start-Stop mode CAUTION the engine will start up again. The warning
The Start-Stop system must always be lamp will switch off.
● The driver door must be closed.
switched off when driving through flooded
● The driver must have their seat belt fas- areas ››› page 177. Additional information related to the auto-
tened. matic gearbox
● The bonnet must be closed. The engine stops when the selector lever is in
● The engine must have reached a minimum Stopping/Starting the engine the positions P, D, N and S, in addition to
service temperature. when in manual mode. With the selector lev-
Vehicles with a manual gearbox er in position P, the engine will also remain
● The reverse gear must not be engaged.
switched off when you take your foot off the
● The vehicle must not be on a very steep – Before stopping the vehicle or when it has
brake pedal. In order to start the engine up
slope. already stopped, put it into neutral and re- again the accelerator must be pressed, or an-
lease the clutch pedal. The engine will other gear engaged or the brake released.
WARNING switch off. The warning lamp  will appear
on the instrument panel display. The en- If the selector lever is placed in position R
● Never switch the engine off until the vehi- during the stopping phase, the engine will
gine may stop before stopping the vehicle
cle is stationary. The brake servo and power in the deceleration phase (at 7 km/h). start up again.
steering functions will not be completely cov-
ered under warranty. More force may also be – When the clutch pedal is pressed the en- Change from position D to P to prevent the
needed to turn the steering wheel or to brake. gine will start up again. The warning lamp engine from accidentally starting when
As you cannot steer and brake in the normal will switch off. changing and passing by position R.

1) Only in vehicles with Keyless Access.


176
Driver assistance systems

Note ● The interior temperature selected for the air Note

Technical data
conditioner has not yet been reached.
● You can control whether the engine should In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, if the
switch off or not by reducing or increasing the ● The interior temperature is very high/low. selector lever is placed in position D, N or S
brake force applied. While the vehicle re- ● Defrost function button activated after engaging reverse gear, the vehicle must
mains stopped, the engine will not stop if the ›››  page 39. be driven at a speed faster than 10 km/h (6
brake pedal is slightly pressed, in traffic jams mph) for the system to return to conditions in
● The parking aid* is switched on.
with frequent stopping and starting for exam- which the engine can be stopped.
ple. As soon as strong pressure is applied to ● The battery is very low.
the brake pedal, the engine will stop.

Advice
● The steering wheel is overly turned or is be-
● In vehicles with manual gearbox, during ing turned. Manually switching on/off the Start-
the stopping phases the brake pedal must re-
main depressed to prevent the vehicle from
● If there is a danger of misting. Stop system
moving. ● After engaging reverse gear.
● If the engine “stalls” in vehicles with man- ● In case of a very steep gradient.
ual gearbox, it can be directly started up

Operation
again by immediately pressing the clutch The indication  is shown on the instrument
pedal. panel display, and in addition, the driver in-
formation system* shows, .

General notes The engine starts by itself

Emergencies
During a stopping phase the normal Start-
The system can interrupt the Start-Stop mode Stop mode can be interrupted in the follow-
frequently for different reasons. ing situations: The engine restarts by itself
Fig. 152 Centre console: Start-Stop system
without involvement from the driver.
button.
The engine does not switch off
● The interior temperature differs from the
Before the stopping phase, the system veri- value selected on the air conditioner. If you do not wish to use the system, you can
fies whether certain conditions are met. The switch it off manually.
engine does not switch off, in the following ● Defrost function button activated

Safety
situations for example: ›››  page 39. – To manually switch on/off the Start-Stop
● The brake has been pressed several times system, press the button  . The button
● The engine has not yet reached the mini- consecutively. symbol remains lit up yellow when the sys-
mum required temperature for the Start-Stop tem is switched off. »
● The battery is too low.
mode.
● High power consumption.
177
Operation

Note Cruise control system (CCS)* Control lamp


The system is automatically switched on each  Lights up
time the engine is deliberately stopped dur- Operation
ing a stopping phase. The engine will start The cruise control system (CCS) is switched on and ac-
automatically. tive.

OR: Or the adaptive cruise control (ACC) is switched on


and active.
Driver messages on the instrument OR: the speed limiter is switched on and active.
panel display
Several warning and control lamps light up
Start-Stop system deactivated. for a few seconds when the ignition is switch-
Start the engine manually ed on, signalling that the function is being
This driver message is displayed when cer- verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
tain conditions are not met during the stop- onds.
ping phase and the Start-Stop system cannot
restart the engine. The engine must be star- Displayed on the CCS screen
ted manually. Status Fig. 153:
Fig. 153 Instrument panel display: CCS status
Start-Stop system: Fault! Func- indications. A CCS temporarily switched off. The set
tion not available speed is displayed in small or darkened
Read the additional information carefully figures.
There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take ›››  page 34
the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault B System error. Contact a specialised work-
repaired. The cruise control system (CCS) is able to shop.
maintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15 C CCS switched on. The speed memory is
mph). empty.
The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by ceas- D The CCS is switched on. The set speed is
ing to accelerate, not by actively braking the displayed in large figures.
vehicle ››› .
WARNING
Use of the cruise control could cause acci-
dents and severe injuries if it is not possible

178
Driver assistance systems

to drive at a constant speed maintaining the Operating the cruise control system* ● If the selector of the dual clutch gearbox

Technical data
safety distance. DSG® is disengaged from the D/S position.
● Do not use the cruise control in heavy traf-
Read the additional information carefully
fic, if the distance from the vehicle in front is ›››  page 34 WARNING
insufficient, on steep roads, with several The value indicated in the table in brackets After use, always switch off the speed limiter
bends or in slippery circumstances (snow, (in mph, miles per hour) only refers to instru- to prevent the speed being regulated against
ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads. ment panels with indications in miles. your wishes.
● Never use the CCS when driving off-road or ● The speed limiter does not relieve the driv-
on unpaved roads. er of their responsibility to drive at the appro-

Advice
Changing gear in CCS mode
● Always adapt your speed and the distance priate speed. Do not drive at high speed if not
The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutch necessary.
to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility,
pedal is pressed, intervening again automati-
weather conditions, the condition of the road ● Using the speed limiter with adverse
and the traffic situation.
cally after a gear is engaged.
weather conditions is dangerous and can
● To avoid unexpected operation of the cruise cause serious accidents, e.g. because of
Travelling down hills with the CCS aquaplaning, snow, ice, leaves, etc. You

Operation
control system, turn it off every time you fin-
ish using it. When travelling down hills the CCS cannot should use the speed limiter function only
maintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicle when traffic, road and weather conditions al-
● It is dangerous to use a set speed which is
down using the brake pedal and reduce low it to be used safely.
too high for the prevailing road, traffic or
weather conditions. gears if required. ● When driving downhill, the speed limiter
cannot limit the vehicle speed. Its speed will
● When travelling down hills, the CCS cannot
increase due to its own weight. In this case,

Emergencies
maintain a constant speed. The vehicle tends Automatic off
select a lower gear or use the foot brake to
to accelerate under its own weight. Select a The cruise control system (CCS) is switched slow the vehicle.
lower gear or use the foot brake to slow the off automatically or temporarily:
vehicle.
● If the system detects a fault that could af-
WARNING fect the working order of the CCS.
● If you press and maintain the accelerator
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning
pedal for a cert